JP6761666B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a typical game machine of this type, variable display is performed, for example, when the display result becomes a specific display result (big hit symbol), it is configured to be controllable to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. Is known. In this type of gaming machine, the variable display that has not yet been started in the variable display is stored as a hold memory, and the hold memory is displayed as a hold display.

Some of such conventional game machines execute an effect of changing the display mode of one hold display in a plurality of stages (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-212304 (paragraph number 0418, etc.)

However, in the conventional game machine, there is a lack of interest in the game, such as the effect of changing in a plurality of stages is not related to the mode of the hold display and the change timing of the hold display.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game with respect to a change in a mode of holding display.

(1) A gaming machine that can display fluctuations and control it to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player.
Hold storage means for storing information related to variable display as hold storage information (1st special figure hold storage unit 151A, 2nd special figure hold storage unit 151B, 1st start winning command buffer 194A, 2nd start winning command Buffer 194B, etc.) and
Hold display corresponding to hold storage information (hold display, etc.) that can be displayed hold display unit (image display unit 5, RAM 102, the first start winning storage display area 5HL, second start winning storage display area 5HR etc.),
While the variation display is being executed, the variation response display means (production control CPU 120, S532 in FIG. 25, etc.) capable of performing the variation response display (active display, etc.) corresponding to the variation display, and
The change in the hold display mode (change during the hold display in FIG. 43) that changes the mode of the hold display before the change display of the target hold storage information is executed, and the mode of the change correspondence display during the execution of the change display. A plurality of timings during the hold display period and the change display period corresponding to the target hold storage information for at least one display mode change with the change of the change corresponding display mode (change during active display in FIG. 44). any timing can be performed in a display form change means of the (effect control CPU 120, S532 of FIG. 25, the icon effect setting processing in FIG. 45, S172, etc. in FIG. 22) and,
At least one of the change effect of the first change effect suggesting the change of the hold display mode and the second change effect suggesting the change of the change corresponding display mode is the hold display period corresponding to the target hold storage information and the hold display period. A change effect executing means that can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during the variable display period is provided.
The display modes of the hold display and the variation-corresponding display to be changed by the display mode changing means are different from the normal mode in the first specific mode (character icon display in FIG. 41 (A)) and the second specific mode (FIG. 41 (B). ), The selection ratio of the timing for executing the display mode change differs (as shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C), the character icon display is on hold. The change effect execution rate is high, and the character icon display has a high change effect execution rate during active display. And, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M), the rate at which the display mode actually changes when the change effect is executed. Is equal between the hold display and the active display. Therefore, the display mode of the icon changes between the hold display and the active display depending on whether the character icon is displayed or the character icon is displayed. The frequency of selection is different, and the ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode during the hold display or the active display is different.) And the selection ratio of the timing to execute the change effect is different.
The change effect executing means executes the change effect by selecting from a plurality of types of change effects having different display modes for each of the first change effect and the second change effect.
Of the first timing and the second timing included in a plurality of timings during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage information for each of the first specific mode and the second specific mode. When the timing with the lower selection ratio is selected, the rate at which the degree of expectation for the player changes to a predetermined or higher display mode is higher than when the timing with the higher selection ratio is selected.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the display mode and the timing of the change of the display mode of the hold display and the change-corresponding display to be changed with respect to the change of the hold display mode and the change of the display mode of the change. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the mode of the hold display.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
During variable display of, and when changing the mode of fluctuation corresponding display, and when not to change the aspect of fluctuation corresponding display, in the common effect (e.g., a first change in system production which is commonly performed, figure directing and up before the group Y1 strikes the active display, in the second system change effect, the effect, etc.) until the arrow Y2 collides active display frame surrounding the active display, variable after executing the common effect Successful effects that change the mode of motion-corresponding display (for example, in the first system change effect, an effect in which a figure of one of the shapes "stars" of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and changes to the display mode of stars, In the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame to change the line thickness of the active display frame, and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed. active display and effect like changing the display mode of the active display frame or the like) or failure game that does not change the mode of fluctuations corresponding display (e.g., in the first system change effect, any shape of the figure group Y1 active display In the effect that the "star" figure disappears before colliding and the display mode of the active display does not change, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and is active. An effect that does not change the line thickness of the display frame, an effect that does not change the active display or one or both of the active display frames by executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect, etc. ) And , with additional production execution means that can execute
Of the plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display, the ratio of executing the success effect differs depending on which timing the common effect is executed.

With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the execution timing of the common effect. Further, by paying attention to the execution timing, the expectation of the player can be improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
Regarding the hold display, it is possible to display one of the first specific display and the second specific display and then change the display to the other display (for example, the display mode of the hold display is a character icon). Description of transformation example etc. that changes from display to character icon display).

According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the change in the display mode of the specific display or the change in the type of the specific display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The first change effect suggesting a change in the hold display mode (change effect during hold display in which an arrow acts on the hold display as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C)) and the change correspondence Select one of the second change effect suggesting a change in the display mode (change effect during active display in which an arrow acts on the active display as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C)). Further equipped with change effect means (CPU 120 for effect control, S532 in FIG. 25, S172 in FIG. 22, etc.) that can be executed.
The change effect means has a different rate of changing the display mode for each of the first change effect and the second change effect (for the change effect during pending display, at the time of a big hit in FIGS. 26 (F) and 26 (H)). The no-change determination ratio differs between the first change effect and the second change effect, and the no-change determination ratio at the time of a big hit in FIGS. 26 (J) and 26 (L) differs between the third change effect and the fourth change effect. Regarding the change effect during active display, the determination ratio of no change at the time of big hit in FIGS. 26 (G) and (I) differs between the first change effect and the second change effect, and in FIGS. 26 (K) and 26 (M). The determination rate for no change at the time of a big hit differs between the third change effect and the fourth change effect.) Multiple types of change effects (the first change effect and the second change effect for the change effect during hold display, or the third Change effect and fourth change effect. Change effect selected from the first change effect and the second change effect, or the third change effect and the fourth change effect for the change effect during active display (shown in FIG. 42). As described above, in the case of the character icon display, the effect mode of the change effect selected from the first change effect and the second change effect during the hold display or the active display. In the case of the character icon display, the hold display or the active display. The change effect is performed by the effect mode of the change effect selected from the third change effect and the fourth change effect.

According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the change mode of the hold display mode change or the change corresponding display mode change, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
For each of the first specific display and the second specific display, the selection ratio is high when the timing with the lower selection ratio is selected from the first timing and the second timing included in the plurality of timings. Compared to when one of the timings is selected, the rate at which the degree of expectation for the player changes to a display mode equal to or higher than a predetermined value is higher (for example, the character icon display is as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C)). In addition, the ratio of selecting the display mode change of the character icon during the active display is lower than that during the hold display, but as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I), the hold display is displayed during the active display. In comparison, the "super heat" display, which has a high level of expectation for big hits, is more likely to be selected as the character icon display after the display mode has changed).

According to such a configuration, the player can pay more attention to the mode of change of the hold display depending on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to one aspect of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for a game counted on the side of a main board. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation category and fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a block diagram or the like which shows the structural example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a start winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the selection example of the variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variable category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of a prize in the effect control process process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern table at the time of hold selection. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode at the time of execution of active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of execution of the 1st system change effect. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the determination ratio by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of execution of the 1st system change effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the display mode change effect and the presence or absence of display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. It is a figure which shows the character icon selection table and the character icon selection table. It is a figure which shows the change effect pattern table. It is a display screen diagram which shows the effect display example when the character icon is displayed as a hold display in an image display device. It is a display screen diagram which shows the effect display example of an active display after displaying a character icon as a hold display in an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the icon effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect example which selects the execution timing of the display mode change effect during hold display from a plurality of timings.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower portion of the game area on the game board 2. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. Although the normally variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening even when it is in the normally open state, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter more than when it is in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. In this way, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normally open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The winning by detecting the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as the first starting winning. Further, a prize obtained by detecting a game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first starting winning opening), a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls Is paid out as a prize ball, and if the number of stored first special figures (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special figure executed by the first special symbol display device 4A A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a game (described later) or a variable display of decorative symbols (described later) executed by the image display device 5 is satisfied. Further, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning opening), a predetermined number (for example, 3) If the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special figure reserved storage number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second special symbol display device 4B executes the second game ball. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game (described later) or a variable display of decorative symbols (described later) executed by the image display device 5 is established. The number of prize balls paid out based on the first start winning prize and the number of prize balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same number or different numbers.

The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed when the first start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed. When the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the state of waiting for execution). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning prize in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved first special figures decreases by one each time one of the first start conditions is satisfied.

Information on the variable display corresponding to the first start prize, although the first start condition by a certain first start prize is satisfied, but the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start prize is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved first special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first special figure reservation information is executed.

The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning is generated and the execution is temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of the decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied earlier is being executed. When the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the state of waiting for execution). That is, the second special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning prize in the state of waiting for execution. The number of reserved second special figures is reduced by one each time one of the second start conditions is satisfied.

Information on the variable display corresponding to the second start prize, in which the second start condition is satisfied by a certain second start prize, but the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is satisfied. In other words, the reserved second special figure reservation information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested second special figure reservation information is executed.

When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "starting winning openings". Further, when the first start prize and the second start prize are not particularly distinguished, it is also simply referred to as "start prize". Further, the number of reserved memories obtained by adding the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure is referred to as "total reserved memory number". When the first special figure holding memory number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as "special figure holding storage number", but simply "special figure holding storage number". When referred to as the "memory number", it may refer to any one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition" or "execution condition". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "start condition". Further, when the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "special figure reservation information".

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B) of the game board 2. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and serves as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big winning opening.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. I can't do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) Make it easier. In this way, the big winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state where the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous for the player. To do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and the game It becomes a second state that is disadvantageous to the person.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side portion of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED (light emitting diode) of a dot matrix or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays a special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each of them (referred to as variable display or variable display). To do. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "special symbol". Also referred to as "second special figure". Further, a game (or the variable display of the identification information itself) executed with the variable display of the identification information is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variablely displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as the first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game in which the second special figure is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, it is also simply referred to as a "special figure game".

The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) is a special symbol game of a plurality of types composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol has a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, if each number indicating "0" to "9" is assigned a symbol number of "0" to "9", and a symbol indicating "-" is assigned a symbol number of "10". Good. The special symbol is not limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) having different combinations of lighting and extinguishing in a 7-segment LED are set in advance as special symbols. It may be displayed.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side portion of the game area (upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) in the game board 2. .. The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). The first hold display to be displayed as possible is performed. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special figure hold storage identifiable by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the number of holds for the first special figure game increases by one due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the hold for the first special figure game is held due to the establishment of the new first start condition. When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold storage number (the number of holds of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second hold display is performed to display as possible. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, if the number of holds for the second special figure game increases by one due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the hold for the second special figure game is held due to the establishment of the new second start condition. When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display 20, and a normal symbol hold display 25C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of reserved memory (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 The normal map start condition for executing the normal map game (described later) executed in is satisfied.

The ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like, similarly to the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The ordinary symbol display 20 variably displays (variablely displays) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a "general diagram" or "ordinary symbol") which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. A variable display game in which a normal symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or "normal figure game"). Information about the Fuzu game in which the Fuzu start condition is satisfied but the Fuzu start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as hold data (Public map hold information).

The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages based on the hold data (normal figure hold information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The normal figure hold memory number is the number of normal figure games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. When the normal figure start condition for executing the normal figure game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, but the normal figure start condition for allowing the start of the normal figure game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established Fuzu game is running), the execution of the Fuzu game is suspended (the Fuzu game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of reserved fuzu games is the number of games of the fuzu game waiting to be executed. The number of reserved normal maps is reduced by 1 each time one condition for starting a normal map is satisfied.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images.

A decorative pattern display area is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display). The variable display of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A, or a second special figure executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of either the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, the start of the fluctuation of either the first special figure or the second special figure. Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, corresponding to the end of the special figure game, that is, corresponding to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol, final) that becomes a variable display result. (Also called a stop symbol) is displayed as a stop. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

The decorative design is, for example, eight kinds of designs (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numbers, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, and a combination of numbers, characters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is given a corresponding symbol number. As an example, each alphanumeric character indicating "1" to "8" may be given a symbol number of "1" to "8". The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and any number may be used as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a losing combination can be configured (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.).

A stop display that stops and displays the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol (also called the special symbol display result) and ends the variable display, or a fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol (final stop symbol) The stop display that stops and displays the variable display to end the variable display, and the stop display that stops and displays the confirmed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also called the normal symbol display result) and ends the variable display are complete. Also referred to as stop display, final stop display, or derivation display (or simply "deriving"). The fluctuation start timing and fluctuation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily have to coincide with the fluctuation start timing and fluctuation end timing of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol is within the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special symbol fluctuation time). The fluctuation time should be settled.

That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (stop of the confirmed decorative symbol). It may be later than the display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later), which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol. In the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed is "0" is stopped and displayed while causing, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction, or is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). It includes things such as those that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking, expansion and contraction, etc.

Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL and the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL, the first hold display for identifiablely displaying the number of the first special figure hold storage is performed, as in the case of the first hold display 25A. That is, the number of the first special figure games currently suspended for execution is displayed in a identifiable manner. In the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL, the second hold display for identifiablely displaying the number of the second special figure hold storage is performed as in the second hold display 25B. That is, the number of the second special figure games currently suspended for execution is displayed in a identifiable manner.

In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. That is, when the number of hold of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the first start prize memory display is displayed if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize memory display area 5HL. A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning memory display area 5HL If there is another 1st hold display, the new 1st hold is on the left side of the other 1st hold display (if there are multiple other 1st hold displays, the leftmost side of the leftmost 1st hold display). You may add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold displays in the first start prize memory display area 5HL and the number of hold of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the decrease is the first. The first hold display (the oldest displayed first hold display) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is deleted. The other first hold display is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

Further, in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of holds for the second special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second start prize memory display is displayed if there is no other second hold display in the second start prize memory display area 5HR. A new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information on the left side of the area 5HR (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the second start winning memory display area 5HR If there is another second hold display in, the new second hold is on the right side of the other second hold display (or to the right of the rightmost second hold display if there are multiple other second hold displays). You may add a display.

In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold displays in the second start prize memory display area 5HR and the number of hold of the second special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second of the decrease is The second hold display (the oldest displayed second hold display) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is deleted. Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). When the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start winning memory display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as "starting prize memory display area 5H".

Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, as a hold display area, in addition to the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start winning memory display area 5HR, the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second The hold display deleted (moved) from the start prize memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second special figure held information digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Special figure Displays a special image showing information including active display (also called variable display, digestion display, this time display, etc.) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol executed based on the hold information. Active display area AHA (variable display area, digestion display area, digestion display area, this time hold display area, this time hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display area, this time display area, this time display (Also referred to as an area, a display unit at the time of digestion, etc.) is arranged between, for example, the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL and the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start winning memory display area 5HR, but is active. The display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, an active display or an active display or an active display of characters, images, and the like displayed around the active display frame and around the active display frame. Information and the like corresponding to the above are displayed by a special image.

In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. .. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be operated by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, left hand). It may be configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation rod.

An inclination direction sensor unit for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilting direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1. Four transmissive types that combine (pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the operation action of the player with respect to the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

A voice output member is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are placed at the lower left and right diagonal parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as the speaker 8. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the game machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the game machine 1.

The production sound includes music, a detection sound, a response sound, a notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, or the like that is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (line, a message) or the like output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a prize in the first start winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action to the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action to the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or voice for notifying the push button 31B to request an operation action, or a sound or voice for notifying that the reach state is changed when the reach state (described later) is changed. , Sounds, voices, etc. that give notice or suggest that the state will be changed to the big hit game state before the state is changed to the big hit game state.

Examples of the warning sound are a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is open, and the like. ..

A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the 9U and the game machine frame 3. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are not particularly distinguished, they are collectively referred to as a lamp 9. The lamp 9 may be composed of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp having a rotating portion (for example, a patrol lamp). In addition to the above, various light emitting members may be installed, for example, around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like are production devices that execute the production, but the game machine 1 may include other production devices such as a production model having a drive unit as the production device.

The arrangement position (installation position) of each configuration is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the ordinary symbol display 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the normal figure hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal map start condition is satisfied after the normal map start condition is satisfied. In the normal symbol game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started), when the predetermined time that becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is obtained. Is stopped and displayed (derivative display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol loss". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per normal figure", the expansion / opening control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilt position. However, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a predetermined time elapses.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second Based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, the special figure game (second special figure game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In the special symbol game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is confirmed special. The symbol (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it will be "missing".

After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also referred to as a "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number "2" is used as a small hit symbol. The special symbol indicating the "-" symbol is the lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a symbol, and a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the predetermined upper limit time. The large winning opening is opened during the period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or the predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The large winning opening door that opens the large winning opening during the execution of the round catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the large winning opening, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "15"). Even before the number of rounds to be executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has not won a prize in the large winning opening).

Among the rounds in the jackpot game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are the jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are the normal open round jackpot symbols, and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state as the normal open round specific game state (normal open big hit state), which is controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the big prize opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 The door opens the large winning opening until the predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds), which is the first period, elapses, or until the predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls is generated. As a result, a round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed. The normally open jackpot state is also referred to as the first specific game state.

Short-term open round as a definite special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the jackpot symbol is derived In the jackpot game state as a specific game state (short-term open jackpot state), the special variable winning ball device 7 is used in each round. The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time for changing to the first state, which is advantageous for the player, is shorter than the first period in the normally open jackpot state (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened by the big winning opening door). .1 second). In the short-term open jackpot state, the opening period of the big winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open jackpot state. Alternatively, in the short-term open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the number of second rounds (for example, "2") less than the number of first rounds (for example, "15") in the normal open jackpot state.

In such a short-term open jackpot state, if a game ball wins in the big winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained. However, the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds, etc.), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open jackpot state is a jackpot game state in which no balls (prize balls) can be obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also referred to as the second specific game state.

Further, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term open round specific gaming state is not limited to the one in which the opening period of the big winning opening is shorter than that of the jackpot gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state. The period (upper limit time) is the same for the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, while in the short-term open round specific game state, the maximum number of times (for example, 2 times) to open the large winning opening is It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period for changing the big prize opening to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is from the first period in the normal open round specific game state. It suffices to be at least one of a short second period and a second round in which the number of rounds executed is less than the number of the first round in the normally open round specific game state. ..

As described above, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Advantages for the player may include other advantageous states such as a probability variation state (high probability state), a time saving state, and a high base state, in addition to the jackpot gaming state described above.

After the special symbol indicating the number "2", which is the small hit symbol, is derived as the definite special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hit game state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball device 7 to change the large winning opening to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player, as in the short-term open big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B are used. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of any of the special figure games. Then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. It may be in a predetermined reach state that forms part of a combination of indications.

The reach state refers to a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variable symbol") that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination. Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols are fluctuating in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, the reach state is also referred to as the reach is established (reach is established).

In addition, in response to the reach state, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back a moving image different from the decorative pattern, and changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a character image display, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the change mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect (or reach effect display). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like are performed before the reach state is reached. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode of.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different. As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach, are set (prepared) in advance.

The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a jackpot) x (probability of being a jackpot) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a jackpot) x (probability of being a jackpot) + (other than at the time of a jackpot) It is calculated by (probability that the effect is executed) x (probability of not becoming a big hit)} (when the big hit expectation is "1", the variable display result is always "big hit").

Further, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one aspect of the variable display effect, a sliding effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like realized by the variable display operation of the decorative symbol or the like can be executed. In the sliding effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then in a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.). After the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbol display area (for example, "left") of the decorative symbol display area (for example, "left") is displayed as the decorative symbol display area 5L. By changing the decorative symbol again in one or both of the decorative symbol display areas 5R on the “right” and then stopping the display, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed. In this way, in the sliding effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of decorative symbols are variable. By executing the display again, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, or the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed without being in the reach state.

In the pseudo-continuous production, a fixed decoration that results in a variable display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. By the time the symbol is derived and displayed, all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance eye or the like is a part of any part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, or After temporarily stopping the display (displayed on all), the re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting the variable display of all the decorative symbols again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, is performed a predetermined number of times (displayed on all). For example, it can be performed up to 4 times.

In the present embodiment, the number of re-variable displays (re-variable display times) in the pseudo-continuous production is variable display (first variable) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Number of times (1 time), number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (1 time), and re-variable between initial variable display and final variable display It is grasped as the number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) that is one less than the total number of times (X + 2). Further, the number of re-variable display is the same as the number of times when all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (the number of temporary stops) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The first variable display-the first temporary stop display is also called the first pseudo-ream, the second variable display (first re-variable display) -the second temporary stop display is also called the second pseudo-ream, and the third time. Variable display (2nd re-variable display) ~ 3rd temporary stop display is also called the 3rd pseudo-ream, 4th variable display (3rd re-variable display) ~ 4th temporary stop display is the 4th Also called a pseudo-ream of. Further, the number of pseudo-series in the pseudo-series effect is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the number of revariable displays, and the number of temporary stops are the same. Increasing the number of pseudo-reams such as the first, second, third, ... Is also referred to as "pseudo-ream continues".

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", the decorative pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the re-variable display (re-variation) once to four times. The display can be made to appear as if it was started 2 to 5 times in a row.

In the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream chance is temporarily stopped in any part or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R before the reach is established (before the reach is reached) in the fluctuation. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so as to be performed, and after the reach is established, the decorative symbols are simulated in any part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the consecutive chance eyes are temporarily stopped. That is, there are at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is displayed before the reach state and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the reach state is reached. You may.

The sliding effect (similar to the pseudo-continuous effect) may be a notice or suggestion to the player that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that a big hit expectation is high. .. Hereinafter, an effect for notifying or suggesting to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the expectation of a big hit is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the sliding effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the advance notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the sliding effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display, a message window display, etc. Some may use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

In the present embodiment, as a notice effect, it is common when the display mode of the special image representing the information including the active display corresponding to the change is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. Includes common effects performed in. Further, the advance notice effect includes a success effect in which the display mode of the special image is changed after the common effect is executed, and a failure effect in which the display mode of the special image is not changed after the common effect is executed. The notice effect may include a suggestion effect that suggests a common effect. Further, the suggestion effect may be an effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, as in the common effect. In other words, a production that suggests that a common effect is executed is called a suggestion effect, and an effect that suggests that either a success effect or a failure effect is executed (common effect or common effect). Another effect) may be referred to as a suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether or not the content of the advance notice or suggestion is realized. For example, the notice effect that gives notice or suggests to the player that the variable display state of the decorative symbol due to the winning of a certain game ball may be in the reach state is at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol due to the winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, the notice effect that gives notice or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to the winning of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" is at least from the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol due to the winning of the game ball. May be executed (started) before.

The advance notice effect may include a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as "preliminary determination advance notice effect"). In the pre-reading notice effect, before starting the variable display subject to the notice, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" based on the hold information of the special figure game. (Look ahead), it is a notice effect to be executed based on the judgment result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display, and the target hold information is supported. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as the second hold display of the target, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information of the target is also referred to as the variable display of the target. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information is being digested including the variable display of the target), and before the target hold information. It may be executed during the digestion of the pending information, or during the digestion of the pending information of the target, and during the digestion of the pending information prior to the pending information of the target.

In the production operation that becomes the pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball, the player decides whether or not the content announced by the pre-reading notice effect is realized after the game ball wins (after the start condition is satisfied). It suffices to be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a pre-reading advance notice effect for notifying (suggesting) a player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative symbol due to the winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before the variable display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least the effect of the game ball, which is a pre-reading advance notice effect for notifying (suggesting) the player in advance that the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to the winning of a certain game ball, is It suffices to execute (start) before the confirmed decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

The pre-reading notice effect (preliminary determination advance notice effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize memory display area 5HL, and a hold change effect in the first start prize memory display area 5HL. An action effect such as a hold change effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. Further, the pre-reading advance notice effect (preliminary determination advance notice effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display in the second start prize memory display area 5HR, and a hold change effect in the second start prize memory display area 5HR. An action effect such as a hold change effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

When a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed or the like, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "3" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is displayed. A definite decoration that becomes a predetermined normal jackpot combination (also referred to as "non-probability variable jackpot combination") among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations after a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the reach state. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, the same type of normal symbol (also referred to as "non-probability variation symbol") on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a combination that displays the final stop. As an example of a normal symbol, among eight types of decorative symbols having symbol numbers "1" to "8", four types of decorative symbols having even-numbered symbol numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" Is.

In response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. , It is called a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "non-probability variation" (also referred to as "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-probability change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed.

By performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control as in the executed state) is performed. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is displayed. Of the multiple types of jackpot combinations, a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is performed after the same reach effect as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "normal" is executed in response to the reach state. The fixed decorative pattern that becomes is sometimes displayed as a stop. In other words, when the probabilistic jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the special figure game, the decorative symbol which is the predetermined probabilistic jackpot combination is finally stopped and the decorative symbol which is the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. It may be done. The predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is, for example, a combination in which the same type of probability variation symbols are aligned on the effective line and finally stopped and displayed. An example of a probabilistic symbol is an odd number of "1", "3", "5", and "7" among eight kinds of decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are "1" to "8". Is.

Regardless of whether the fixed decoration symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmation special symbol in the special symbol game has a variable display result of "big hit". It is also referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "probability variation" in the case. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "probability change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after the end, probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be terminated when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit game state and the control is performed again in the big hit game state is satisfied. As with the time saving control, the probability variation control may be terminated when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, the probability variation control may be terminated when the probability variation control is determined to be terminated in the probability variation fall lottery executed every time the special figure game is started after the jackpot game state is completed. ..

When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the normal symbol is variable in each normal symbol game. Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per normal" compared to the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "per normal" The second is to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to be longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts from the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the starting condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening due to the time saving control, which is advantageous for the player, is also called a high opening control. As the high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the expanded open state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the second special symbol game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is next. Is shortened until it becomes a "big hit". The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

The gaming state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which time saving control and high opening control are performed together with probability variation control is also called a high probability high base state. A probabilistic state in which only probabilistic control is performed and time reduction control or high open control is not performed is also called a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time reduction control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control is sometimes referred to as a "probability change state", and in order to distinguish it from the high probability low base state, it may be referred to as a time reduction probability change state. On the other hand, a probabilistic state (high-probability low-base state) in which only probabilistic control is performed and time-saving control or high-opening control is not performed may be a probable-change state without time-saving in order to distinguish it from a high-probability high-base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without the probability change control is also called the low probability high base state. The normal state in which the probability change control, the time reduction control, and the high opening control are not performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be executed frequently, and each special figure game (first special figure game) By increasing the probability that the variable display result in the figure game and the second special figure game will be a "big hit", the player will be in an advantageous state. A gaming state that is advantageous for a player different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state.

As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may not be in the reach state, and any combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After that, a fixed decorative pattern that has a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a short-term open round jackpot symbol is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "sudden probability" (also referred to as "sudden big hit" or "sudden change big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "sudden probability", it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state, and after the end, the probability change control may be performed together with the time saving control.

As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the game is controlled to the small hit game state. After that, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled before the variable display result becomes "small hit". However, if the number of times the special figure game is executed in the special game state reaches a predetermined number when the special figure game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, after the end of the small hit game state, The special game state may end and become the normal state.

The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable jackpot combination or a probabilistic jackpot combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after the decorative symbols that are normally a jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, they are changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned, and the probability variable jackpot combination is used. Either the decorative symbol (probability variation symbol) or the decorative symbol (normal symbol) that is a normal jackpot combination may be finally stopped and displayed as the final decorative symbol.

After the definite decorative symbol, which is usually a jackpot combination, is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one of the rounds is completed in the jackpot game state, while the round is being executed at the start of the jackpot game state or in the jackpot game state. During the period from the end of the final round in the jackpot game state to the start of the next variable display game, etc., the promotion to the jackpot medium, which is a probabilistic notification effect of whether or not to control the probabilistic state. The production may be performed. It should be noted that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot game state. In the big hit game state, the big hit middle promotion effect that is executed after the final round is finished is sometimes called "ending promotion effect" in particular.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and the like are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a function for setting a random number used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function to output various information to a hall management computer, and the like. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

On the main board 11, for example, from the game control microcomputer 100, the switch circuit 110 that takes in the detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 and the like that transmit the solenoid drive signal of the above to the solenoids 81 and 82 are mounted.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, a speaker 8, and a lamp. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as 9 are installed. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effect such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the lamp 9 or the like. It has a function of determining the control content for executing a predetermined effect operation.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is for outputting sound from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and lights / turns off drive of the lamp 9 or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit to perform.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. It should be. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the game machine 1 also has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown)) that are similarly connected to the main board 11. ) May be provided, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, and a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave). Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the general figure hold display 25C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating the variation start in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command for designating a variable pattern such as a decorative symbol that is variably displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3 (B), different EXT data are used depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit" and the decision result of the big hit type. Is set.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the final stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, different EXT data correspond to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the normal open big hit state and the short-term open big hit state, for example. Is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the first starting winning is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A has been satisfied.

The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the second starting winning is generated. This is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the first special figure reserved memory number in a identifiable manner in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like so as to be identifiable.

In the present embodiment, as the reserved memory information, a first start opening prize designation command or a second start opening prize designation command for designating whether the first start win entry has been started or the second start win entry has been started is used. At the same time as transmitting, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are transmitted. When the number of reserved memories increases, the number of reserved memories added to indicate that the number of reserved memories of the first special figure or the second special figure has increased (the first designated command to add the number of reserved memories or the second) While sending the hold storage number addition designation command), when the hold storage number decreases, the hold storage number subtraction designation command (No. 1) indicating that the hold storage number of the first special figure or the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. 1) Hold storage number subtraction designation command or second hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total hold storage number addition designation command (total hold storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted to notify the increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol specification command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" as a winning judgment result, and a judgment result of the big hit type. is there. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is the group name of each group including the variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

In the present embodiment, in the winning random number value determination process (see FIG. 15A), when the starting winning is generated, the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is judged whether or not it is a big hit or whether it is decided as a "small hit", and if it is decided as a "big hit", the type of the big hit is judged based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variable category The fluctuation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command and the variation category command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type based on the value set in the symbol designation command. In addition to being recognizable, the variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the variable category command.

The effect control commands such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). Hereinafter, the effect control command used for controlling the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used for controlling the sound output from the speaker 8 is a voice control command, and the light emitting operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. In addition, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and an update of numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform the operation and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various fluctuations in which the CPU 103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 102. Fluctuation data read operation for reading data, reception operation for CPU 103 to receive input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105, CPU 103 for game control microcomputer 100 via I / O 105 A transmission operation that outputs various signals to the outside is also performed.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category, and the general drawing. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 8, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number values MR1 to MR1. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

Next, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result becomes “loss” is referred to as “loss fluctuation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes "non-reach variation pattern" ("non-reach loss variation pattern" and "non-reach") corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" among the cases where the variable display result is "loss". (Also referred to as "loss) fluctuation pattern") "and" reach fluctuation pattern "(" reach loss fluctuation pattern "" corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" among the cases where the variable display result is "loss". Also called) ”is included.

Further, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" is referred to as "hit fluctuation pattern". The hit fluctuation pattern includes a "big hit fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" and a "small hit fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit". As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each jackpot type may be prepared.

For the non-reach fluctuation pattern, prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times in response to the time reduction control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large or when the game state is the probability change state or the time reduction state. It is good. As a result, by selecting one of the fluctuation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the game state, it is possible to control to shorten the fluctuation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the game state.

As the fluctuation pattern including the reach effect such as the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the variation pattern according to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. The fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is referred to as a "normal reach variation pattern", and the variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed is referred to as a "super reach variation pattern".

FIG. 5 shows specific examples of fluctuation categories and fluctuation patterns in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the fluctuation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA1-1" belongs to the fluctuation category "PA1". The variable category "PA2" is a non-reach (missing) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA2-1" to "PA2-3" belong to the variation category "PA2". The variable category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PA3-1" and "PA3-2" belong to the variation category "PA3". The fluctuation category "PA4" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA4-1" to "PA4-4" belong to the variation category "PA4". The fluctuation category "PA5" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. Fluctuation patterns "PA5-1" to "PA5-4" belong to the variation category "PA5". The variable category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB3-1" and "PB3-2" belong to the variation category "PB3". The variable category "PB4" is a super reach α (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB4-1" to "PB4-4" belong to the variation category "PB4". The variable category "PB5" is a super reach β (big hit) variable category. Fluctuation patterns "PB5-1" to "PB5-4" belong to the variation category "PB5".

The variation pattern "PA2-1" belonging to the variation category "PA2" is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern "PA2-2" is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a sliding effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which the sliding effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA2-3" is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-3" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" because the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The fluctuation pattern "PA1-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA1" is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1".

The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA3-2" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA4" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (loss). The fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (directing) is executed as a gap. It should be noted that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gap. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a ghost. The fluctuation pattern "PA4-3" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA4-4" is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PA5-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA5" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern "PA5-2" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (directing) is executed as a gap. The fluctuation pattern "PA5-3" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PA5-4" is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB3-2" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern "PB4-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB4" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern "PB4-2" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (directing) is executed as a gap. The fluctuation pattern "PB4-3" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB4-4" is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB5-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB5" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern "PB5-2" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (directing) is executed as a ghost. The fluctuation pattern "PB5-3" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern "PB5-4" is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

Although the description of the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot type is abrupt among the small hit fluctuation pattern and the jackpot fluctuation pattern is omitted in FIG. 5, the loss fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern, non-reach fluctuation pattern) described in FIG. It is the same as the reach loss fluctuation pattern) and the jackpot fluctuation pattern (except when the jackpot type is sudden).

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11 and drawings. The data and the like constituting the table as shown in 5 are stored.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6 (A) and the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 6 (B) are previously provided. It is prepared. In the first special symbol display result determination table 130A, a definite special symbol that becomes a variable display result in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state and whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit" for determining the special figure display result. It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 of. In the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, a definite special symbol that is a variable display result in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state and whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit" for determining the special figure display result. It is a table referred to for determination based on the random number value MR1 of.

In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the special figure display is performed according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the disorder for determining the special figure display result is disturbed depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Controlling to a state increases the probability of being determined.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". Since such a setting does not result in a "small hit" in the second special figure game, a normally variable winning ball device 6B such as a time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or a probability variation state (high accuracy high base state) is formed. In a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a "small hit" in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

The second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned different predetermined range determination values to the special figure display result of "small hit". For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". As a result, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of "small hits" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to the special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". The table referenced for. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. Depending on whether (the special figure game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability change", "probability change", or "probability change". It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots such as ".

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as the variable special figure) is the first special figure, the determined value in a predetermined range (also referred to as the variable special figure). A value in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", while when the second special figure game is executed, if the variable special figure is the second special figure, A decision value is not assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, since it is not "probable" in the second special figure game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult "probability" and prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game.

It should be noted that different predetermined values may be assigned to the "probability" jackpot type depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the variable special figure is the second special figure. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability" as compared with the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure. As a result, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of "probability" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a variable category determination table that is referred to for determining the variable category to any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variable category determination tables in which the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the variable category determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category is assigned to each of the variable categories. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the determination values (for example, the range and number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation category among the plurality of variation categories are different from each other. There is. Instead of the plurality of variable category determination tables, one large variable category determination table including the information of all the variable category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables in which the types of fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the fluctuation pattern determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables in which the determination values (for example, the range and number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among the plurality of types of variation patterns are different from each other. There is. Instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including the information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like (for example, special figure). Process flag, etc.). Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. It includes a control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning is generated, but has not yet started. The hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the holding number with the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) to the first starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 or the like is stored as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the number of stored values reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated, but has not yet started. The hold data (second special figure hold information) of (the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and random numbers are generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game balls. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 or the like is stored as hold data (second special figure hold information) until the number of stored values reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

In addition, the hold data of the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A (the first special symbol hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

The normal figure hold storage unit 151C holds hold data (normal figure hold) related to the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information) is memorized. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as hold data (normal figure hold information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 receives a first reserved storage number count value and a second special figure reserved storage number, which are stored values of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number. The second hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the second hold storage counter for counting, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter for counting the total hold storage number, etc. Be remembered.

The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. It is configured to include an output port for transmitting.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. The circuit 124 and the I / O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121 to execute the process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data. The fluctuation data read operation for reading various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the screen, the reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in the one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

Wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command to the voice control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illuminated signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action to the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, a random number circuit 124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

For example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to for determining the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL to any one of a plurality of types. There is. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table and the determination ratios of the respective display modes are different from each other. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each of the display modes of the first hold display. .. In addition, instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table referred to for determining the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. Has been done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table and the determination ratios of the respective display modes are different from each other. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each of the display modes of the second hold display. .. In addition, instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, the ROM 121 stores a hold effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not the hold effect (also referred to as an action effect or a hold change effect) is executed. Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the execution presence / absence of the hold effect is displayed for each of the hold effect without execution and with execution. Allocated. In the present embodiment, the hold effect is a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start prize memory display area 5HL to a notice mode, and is displayed in the second start prize memory display area 5HR. It is a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to the notice mode. There are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5, but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect (successful effect) that changes a special image including an active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with the random number MR7 (not shown) for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect, respectively, with and without execution of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect of changing the special image into a notice mode (main notice effect). That is, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, information according to the active display (for example, characters and images displayed around the active display or the active display and around the active display frame), etc. are used as a notice mode. It is a production to change (main notice production). As described above, the active display change effect includes a common effect, a success effect (also called an active display change effect) executed when the special image is changed after the common effect is executed, and a common effect. It includes a failure effect (also called an active display change effect) that is executed later when the special image is not changed. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not acting on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 but is a special image. This is an effect that does not change the display mode.

Further, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect in which the mode of the special image is changed to one of a plurality of modes by changing the mode of the first system, and a change in the mode of the special image in the second system. A second system change effect that changes to any one of a plurality of aspects is included. The first system change effect has a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. , There are common production, success production, and failure production. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is the effect in the special image. The display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image) is changed.

Further, the ROM 121 is referred to in the ROM 121 for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (timing such as which timing to execute in the fluctuation). The execution timing determination table of the effect is stored. In this first system change effect, the rate at which the success effect related to the first system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables of the first system change effect in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. You may be. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect. There is. Further, instead of the plurality of execution timing determination tables of the first system change effect, one large execution timing determination table of the first system change effect including the information of all the execution timing determination tables of the first system change effect is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

Further, the ROM 121 is referred to in the ROM 121 for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (timing such as which timing to execute in the fluctuation). The execution timing determination table of the effect is stored. In this second system change effect, the rate at which the success effect related to the second system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables for the second system change effect, in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. You may be. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect is assigned to each execution timing in the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect. There is. Further, instead of the plurality of execution timing determination tables of the second system change effect, one large execution timing determination table of the second system change effect including the information of all the execution timing determination tables of the second system change effect is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

In the ROM 121, a plurality of first system changes in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect and the determination ratios of the respective determination ratios are different from each other. The effect execution timing determination table of the effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. In the execution timing determination table of this active display change effect, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with random values (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, and a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned. Further, instead of the execution timing determination table of the plurality of active display change effects, one large execution timing determination table including the information of the execution timing determination tables of all the active display change effects is stored in the ROM 121. May be good.

Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect to any one of a plurality of types. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table of the active display change effect stored in the ROM 121, a random number value (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the active display change effect is used for each of the effect patterns of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as how many changes are to be executed). Further, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the hold change effect execution timing determination table. Further, instead of the plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including the information of all the hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the other main notice effect of the above-mentioned active display change effect to any one of a plurality of types. You may be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main advance notice effect pattern determination tables in which the types of main advance notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main advance notice effect pattern determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main advance notice effect pattern may be assigned to each of the main advance notice effect pattern determination tables. Instead of the plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice effect pattern determination table including information on all the main notice effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect to any one of a plurality of types. In this case, if the ROM 121 is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern for each of the hold change effect pattern determination tables. Good.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gassing effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not the hold change gassing effect is executed. In this case, in the hold change ghost effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether to execute the hold change ghost effect is used for each of the hold change ghost effect without execution and with execution. The determined value) may be assigned.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as how many changes are to be executed). In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change Gase effect execution timing determination tables in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change change effect may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the hold change effect execution timing determination table. Instead of the plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including the information of all the hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to for determining the effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect. In this case, in the ROM 121, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change Gase effect pattern is set in the hold change Gase effect pattern determination table for each of the hold change Gase effect patterns. It may be assigned.

Further, the ROM 121 also has an active display mode determination table (also referred to as a “digestion display mode determination table”) that is referred to for determining the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA to any one of a plurality of types. ) May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display may be assigned to each of the display modes of the active display in the display mode determination table of the active display. That is, the ROM 121 has a plurality of active display display modes in which the determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of active display display modes are different from each other. The decision table may be stored. Instead of the display mode determination table of the plurality of active displays, one large display mode determination table of the active display including the information of the display mode determination tables of all the active displays may be stored in the ROM 121.

Further, the ROM 121 is configured with a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, an image display device 5, a speaker 8, a lamp 9, a model for effect, etc.). The data to be used is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative patterns and advance notice effects (including look-ahead advance notice effects) are realized.

The various effect control patterns are composed of data and the like indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, and is a decoration in the period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the finalized special symbol that is the special symbol display result. Variable display operation of the symbol, reach effect, re-lottery effect, and various other effects that do not involve the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL). It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as production and hold production for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR.

FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code. The contents of various effect controls, the switching timing of the effect control, and the like may be set in series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of motion control in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control CPU 120. Therefore, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to the predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating a display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating a variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode of an effect sound or the like linked to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emitting operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes data indicating a period for effectively detecting an operation on an operation unit such as an operation button 30, a control content of an effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in the manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, the operation specified by the operation detection control data is performed by controlling the speaker 8 to output the sound in the mode specified by the voice control data and controlling the lamp 9 to emit light in the mode specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to determine the effect content by accepting operations on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the valid period. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set for the data corresponding to the effect component that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and is in the variable display of the decorative symbol. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period for executing the advance notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation in response to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period during which the ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). The effect control pattern may be provided.

When setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be temporarily stored in the ROM 121. The storage address in the above may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be specified. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the effect operation corresponding to the corresponding various control data is performed. To control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, lamp 9) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the movable members, etc. of the production model) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data # n, and the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n indicate the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and specify the execution of the effect control. Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data # n are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads the image data indicated by the command from the image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM to develop the image data. Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores the voice data in the voice RAM or the like to develop the voice data. ..

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 10A, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the present embodiment, the data constituting the first start winning command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The reception command buffer 194A at the time of winning the first start is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages. .. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the hold storage number notification command (1st hold storage number notification command) ) Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. A storage area is secured in the first start winning command buffer 194A so that among these commands, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first hold storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores commands in the order received at the time of the first start winning from the beginning in the free area of the command buffer 194A received at the time of the first start winning. At the time of the first start winning, the command is transmitted in the order of the first starting opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the first hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is performed normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4". The category command and the first hold storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "3".

The commands stored in the first start winning command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order between commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening winning designation command. One command (1 set) that has been deleted is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (command associated with the 1st start opening winning designation command) However, it is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the stored state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1" is deleted. , The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" are shifted to the buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "3" is changed to the buffer number "2". To be shifted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the second start winning command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages. .. When there is a start winning to the 2nd start winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the hold storage number notification command (the second hold storage number notification command) ) Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. A storage area is secured in the second start winning command buffer 194B so that among these commands, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the second start winning from the beginning in the free area of the second start winning command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, the command is transmitted in the order of the second starting opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is performed normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4", respectively. , The variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "2".

The commands stored in the second start winning command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order between commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening winning designation command. One command (1 set) that has been deleted is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (command associated with the second start opening winning designation command) However, it is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relationship of the buffer numbers).

For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the stored state shown in FIG. 10 (C), the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1" is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the buffer number "1".

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the first lookahead advance notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first lookahead advance notice buffer 194C is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data constituting the first start winning command buffer 194A. That is, in the first look-ahead advance notice buffer 194C, the decision contents regarding the look-ahead advance notice effect regarding the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". Will be done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, the first is 1 In the read-ahead notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, etc., in the first start winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B, the reserved data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is the other buffer number. When shifted to, in the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

Further, in the present embodiment, the data constituting the second lookahead advance notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second lookahead advance notice buffer 194D is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data constituting the second start winning command buffer 194B. That is, in the second look-ahead advance notice buffer 194D, the decision contents regarding the look-ahead notice effect regarding the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". Will be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning command buffer 194B of FIG. 10 (C) due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, the first 2 In the read-ahead notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol, etc., in the second start winning command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C, the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is the other buffer number. When shifted to, in the second read-ahead notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also shifted to the other buffer number.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the loop process may be started after the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop is executed.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Hereinafter, step S is simply referred to as S. Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (S13). ).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (S14). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the display device 4B, set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and is movable in the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It enables the tilting motion setting of the wing piece.

After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 transmits the control command from the main board 11 to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect control corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning it off from. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S15 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S208 and S211 of FIG. 13 as the start winning process. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S220 of FIG. 14 as the winning random number value determination process.

In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first detects a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (S201; Yes), the first special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the first special figure game) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not it is "4") (S202). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading, for example, the first reserved stored number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved stored number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in S202 (S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (S207).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in S201 (S201; No), when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in S202 (S202; Yes), the process of S209 is executed. After that, whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Is determined (S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (S203; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number (the number of hold of the second special figure game) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not it is "4") (S204). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in S204 (S204; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (S210).

After executing the process of S207, the start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is "0 (initialized)" (S209), and the process proceeds to S203. After executing the process of S210, the start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is "0 (initialized)" (S212), and the start winning determination process is completed. .. As a result, even when the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

As the start winning process (S208, S211), the CPU 103 is updated so as to add 1 to the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer (S215 in FIG. 14). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of S215, the total number of reserved storages is updated to be added by 1 (S216). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of S216, the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (S217). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

Following the process of S218, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (S219). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the process of S219, the winning random number value determination process is executed (S220). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (S221). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

The CPU 103 determines the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by, for example, confirming the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like as the winning random number value determination process (S220). Specify (S401 in FIG. 15 (A)). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state when the probability change flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of S401, the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current game are obtained from the table data constituting the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The table data for determining the special figure display result used for determining the special figure display result is selected according to the state (S402). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in S217 of FIG. 14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the processing of S402 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). it can.

When it is determined in S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (S403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (S404). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the process of S402. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. When it is determined in S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (S404; No), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (S405).

When it is determined in S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (S407).

When it is determined in S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , The table data for determining the jackpot type is selected from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. A setting is made for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the processing of S409 to the effect control board 12 (S410).

After executing any of the processes of S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (S412). That is, the variation category is determined to be one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of S412, the CPU 103 uses a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determination tables in which the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. ), Select one of the variable category determination tables to be set as the table to be used.

Specifically, the CPU 103 has a special figure display result (for example, a determination result of S403 or S404, etc.) and a hold storage number (for example, a stored value of a first hold storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). Select one of the variable category determination tables to be set as the used table based on the first reserved storage count value, etc.). Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses a variable category determination table set as a used table and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining the variable category extracted from, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Based on this, one of the variable categories is determined from among a plurality of types of variable categories.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a selection example of the variable category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variable category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables referred to for determining the variation category to one of a plurality of types. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a variable category determination table based on a variable category determination table among the above four types (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure). FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a variable category determination table based on another variable category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variable category determination table based on yet another variable category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variable category determination table based on yet another variable category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For the sake of simplification of the description, the variable category determination table in which the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 17 (A) is set may be simply referred to as the variable category determination table in FIG. 17 (A). The same applies to FIGS. 17 (B) to 17 (D) and other determination tables such as the fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 shows a selection example in which one of the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (D) is selected, that is, the above-described above. This is a selection example of selecting one of the variable category determination tables from the four types of variable category determination tables.

Variable category determination table "C-TBL1" of FIG. 17 (A) (variable category determination table "C-TBL2" of FIG. 17 (B), variable category determination table "C-TBL3" of FIG. 17 (C), FIG. 17 In the variable category determination table "C-TBL4" of (D) as well), numerical values (determined values) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variable category are assigned to a plurality of types of variable categories.

In the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 17 (A), 0 out of 100 determined values of the random value MR3 (values in the range of "0" to "99") are variable categories. Assigned to "PA1", 70 (values in the range "0" to "69") are assigned to the variable category "PA2", 27 (values in the range "70" to "96") are variable categories Assigned to "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4", and one (value "99") is assigned to the variable category "PA5". There is. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 17 (A), the fluctuation category "PA1" is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category "PA2" is 70% (70 ÷ 100), and so on. The variable category "PA3" is determined at a ratio of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variable category “PA4” is determined at a ratio of 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variable category “PA5” is determined at a ratio of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

In the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL2" of FIG. 17B, 4 out of 100 (values in the range of "0" to "99") of the determination values of the random value MR3 ("0"). (Values in the range of "3") are assigned to the variable category "PA1", 85 (values in the range of "4" to "88") are assigned to the variable category "PA2", and 8 (values in the range "89"). (Values in the range of "96") are assigned to the variable category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4", and one (value "PA4"). 99 ") is assigned to the variable category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL2" in FIG. 17B, the variable category "PA1" is 4% (4 ÷ 100), and the variable category "PA2" is 85% (85 ÷ 100). The variable category "PA3" is determined at a ratio of 8% (8/100), the variable category "PA4" is determined at a ratio of 2% (2/100), and the variable category "PA5" is determined at a ratio of 1% (1/100).

In the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" of FIG. 17 (C), 64 out of 100 (values in the range of "0" to "99") of the determination values of the random value MR3 ("0"). (Values in the range of "63") are assigned to the variable category "PA1", 25 (values in the range of "64" to "88") are assigned to the variable category "PA2", and 8 (values in the range "89"). (Values in the range of "96") are assigned to the variable category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variable category "PA4", and one (value "PA4"). 99 ") is assigned to the variable category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table "CTBL3" in FIG. 17C, the fluctuation category "PA1" is 64% (64/100), the fluctuation category "PA2" is 25% (25/100), and the fluctuation category. The ratio of "PA3" is 8% (8 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category "PA4" is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category "PA5" is 1% (1 ÷ 100).

In the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL4" of FIG. 17 (D), 20 out of 100 (values in the range of "0" to "99") of the determination values of the random value MR3 ("0"). (Values in the range of "19") are assigned to the variable category "PB3", 40 (values in the range of "20" to "59") are assigned to the variable category "PB4", and 40 (values in the range "60"). (Values in the range of "99") are assigned to the variable category "PB5". That is, in the setting example of the variable category determination table "C-TBL4" in FIG. 17 (D), the variable category "PB3" is 20% (20/100), the variable category "PB4" is 40% (40/100), and so on. The variable category "PB5" is determined at a rate of 40% (40/100).

In the setting examples of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C), when the special figure display result is “missing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, it is shortened / non-reach (as compared with when the number of reserved memories is small). Loss) The rate of determination of the variable category (variable category "PA1") is high. Specifically, the determination ratio "64%" of the variation category "PA1" in the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" selected when the special figure display result is "missing" and the number of reserved memories is "4". > The determination ratio "4%" of the variation category "PA1" in the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" selected when the special figure display result is "missing" and the number of reserved memories is "3" or "2". > The determination ratio of the variation category "PA1" in the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" selected when the special figure display result is "missing" and the number of reserved memories is "1" is set to "0%".

Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C), when the special figure display result is "loss", the fluctuation category of super reach (loss) regardless of whether the number of reserved memories is large or small (loss). The determination ratio of the variable category "PA4" or the variable category "PA5") is fixed. Specifically, regardless of which of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1", the variable category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variable category determination table "C-TBL3", the determination ratio of the variable category "PA5" is ". It is set to "1%" and the determination rate of the variable category "PA4" is set to "2%".

Further, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C), any of the variable category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variable category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even if there is, there is a determined value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variable category (the same variable category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1", the variable category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variable category determination table "C-TBL3". Also, the same variable category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is "99", it is any of the variable category determination table "C-TBL1", the variable category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variable category determination table "C-TBL3". Also, the variable category "PA5" is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "97" to "98", the variable category "PA4" is determined in any of the above variable category determination tables.

Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "89" to "96", the variable category "PA3" is determined in any of the above variable category determination tables. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "64" to "69", the variable category "PA2" is determined in any of the above variable category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value (value in each of the above ranges), it will be reach, super reach, super reach α or super reach β in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting example of FIGS. 17 (A) to 17 (C), when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variable category determination table “C-TBL1”, The variable category "PA1" or "PA2" is determined by either the variable category determination table "C-TBL2" or the variable category determination table "C-TBL3". As a result, it is possible to easily determine in advance that at least the reach will not be achieved.

After that, according to the determination result (decision result) by the processing of S412, any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (S413). , Ends the random value judgment process at the time of winning.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. To do.

The special symbol normal processing of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Will be done. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern specification command, and a variable display result notification command. Etc. are included in the transmission setting process for transmitting the above. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. For example, every time the special symbol variation processing of S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or added by 1, and the first The first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) by the special symbol display device 4A, or the second special figure game (special figure using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless of whether it is a game), the elapsed time is measured by a common timer. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation processing of S112 may be a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, and if the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Will be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot release preprocessing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., there is a process to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and set the big winning opening to be in the open state. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is open may be set according to whether the jackpot type is "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for keeping the big prize opening open is set to "29 seconds", and the big prize is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open jackpot state. On the other hand, the upper limit of the period for opening the big winning opening is set to "0.1 seconds" corresponding to the big hit type "probability", and the number of opening of the big winning opening which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed. By setting "15 times", the short-term open jackpot state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process during opening of the jackpot in S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like, the big winning opening It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. ..

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening. In some cases, it includes processing to make settings for sending the jackpot end specification command. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum number of large winning opening openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of large winning opening openings is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc. elapses. It includes a process of waiting until, a process of making various settings for starting probability variation control and time saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The small hit release preprocessing of S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for keeping the big winning opening open is the same as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". By setting "0.1 seconds" and setting the number of times the large winning opening is opened to "15 times", the small hit game state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

The small hit opening process of S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process for determining whether or not it is present. When returning the large winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10".

The small hit end process of S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, an effect device such as an image display device 5, a speaker 8, a lamp 9, or the like waits until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Processing to be done is included. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is on hold. For example, in the process of S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the number of the second special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in S231 (S231; No), the reserved data stored in the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B corresponding to the hold number "1" is special. The random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and updating, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage unit is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in 151B is shifted upward one entry at a time (for example). S233). Further, in the process of S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in S231 (S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is on hold. For example, in the process of S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 may read the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determine whether or not the read value is "0". ..

In this way, since the processing of S235 is executed when it is determined in S231 that the second special figure hold storage number is "0", the first special figure game and the second special figure game When is on hold, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. The second special figure game is not limited to the mode in which the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes) through the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). ), And the special figure game (the first special figure game, the second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start prize (the first start prize, the second start prize) occurs. In this case, it suffices to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine whether to execute the first special figure game or the second special figure game from the stored data.

When the number of the first special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in S235 (S235; No), the reserved data stored in the first special figure reserved storage unit 151A corresponding to the reserved number "1" is special. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the processing of S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updating, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage unit is updated. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in 151A is shifted upward one entry at a time (for example). S237). Further, in the process of S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total hold storage count value stored in the total hold storage counter. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (S238).

After executing either of the processes of S234 and S238, FIG. 15 is used as a table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Similar to the process of S402 shown in (A), the table data for determining the special figure display result is selected (S239). That is, in the processing of S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B was set in the table to be used according to the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of S239, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the table to be used, and when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2". The second special figure display result determination table 130B may be set in the use table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" (S240).

After determining the special figure display result in S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" (S241). Then, when it is determined to be a "big hit" (S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the variable random number buffer can be changed to "non-probability", "probability", and "probability". It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type should be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type matches (S244).

Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (S245), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability", the jackpot type buffer value may be set to "0", if it is "probability variation", it may be set to "1", and if it is "probability", it may be set to "2".

If it is determined in S241 that it is not a "big hit" (S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (S246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (S247).

If it is determined in S246 that it is not a "small hit" (S246; No), or after executing any of the processes of S245 and S247, it is prior to whether or not to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state. A definite special symbol is set according to the determination result and further, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state (S248).

After the fixed special symbol is set in S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in S235 (S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (S250), the special symbol normal processing ends. To do. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

In the fluctuation pattern setting process of S111, the CPU 103 includes the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted.

As described above, when there is a judgment value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same fluctuation category in any of the fluctuation category determination tables according to the number of reserved storages, the judgment corresponding to the same fluctuation category When the random number value MR3 matching the value was extracted at the time of winning, the number of reserved storages was significantly different between the time of executing the winning random number value determination process (S220) and the time of executing the variation pattern setting process (S111). Even so, the variation pattern setting process determines the same variation category as the winning random number value determination process. For example, in the specific example of the variable category determination tables "C-TBL1" to "C-TBL3" described above, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, "99", the prize is won regardless of the number of reserved memories. The variation category "PA5" is determined in both the hourly random value determination process and the variation pattern setting process. If the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of, for example, "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined in both the random value determination process at the time of winning and the variation pattern setting process regardless of the number of reserved memories. Will be done. In the process of S261, it is preferable to determine the variation category using the random value MR3 for determining the variable category stored as the pending data, but the CPU 103 newly extracts the random value MR3 for determining the variable category. Then, the variable category may be determined using the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the variable category.

Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the variation category by using the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, as in S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the variable category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables shown in FIG. 17 based on the special figure display result and the number of reserved storages, and the selected variable category determination table is selected. And the random value MR3 for determining the variable category are used to determine the variable category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the used table from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101 based on the variation category which is the determination result. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns from among a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the fluctuation pattern determination table set as the usage table and the numerical data indicating the above-mentioned random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern. decide.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of fluctuation pattern determination tables according to the fluctuation category. FIG. 19A is an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss)”) among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss)”) among the above eight types. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 19 (D) to 19 (H).

As described above, in the start winning determination process of S101, the main board 11 is set to transmit the start opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 (S219). ), The transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special figure display result determined in S403, S404, S409, etc. is made (S405, S407, S410), and the variation category determined in S412 is set. The transmission setting (S413) for transmitting the variable category command is performed, and the transmission setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command is performed (S221).

After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11, the game ball passes (enters) the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). When the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, hold storage number notification command Four commands (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

Further, on the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing of S110, a definite special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol is obtained by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the like. It is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process of S111, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process of S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the fixed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern specification command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like are produced. Transmission settings for transmission to the control board 12 are made. When the variable display is started by executing the command control process of S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variable pattern specification command, and the like are within one timer interrupt. It is sent in a batch. Note that the command is not limited to those that are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process of S17 for each timer interrupt.

That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as "big hit" or "small hit" in the special symbol normal processing (S110), and the big hit game state. It is decided whether or not to control the small hit game state, and the specific variable display mode (variable pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined by the variable pattern setting process (S111), and each production control command is made. The content determined by is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a "big hit" or "small hit" or "small" is performed by the winning random number value determination process (S220). Judgment as to whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state as "hit", the judgment of the roughly variable display mode (variable category) of the decorative pattern, etc. are performed, and it is determined by each production control command. The content is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described.
When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 20 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and mounts the effect control board 12. Set the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (S72; No), the process of S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like is generated from the main board 11 in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control that becomes an effect control command or the like is performed from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. Capture the signal.

The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on in S72 (S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (S73), and the command analysis process is executed (S74). In the command analysis process executed in S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read out. Settings and controls corresponding to the production control commands are performed.

After executing the command analysis process in S74, the effect control process process is executed (S75). In the effect control process process of S75, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emitting operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model are performed. The control content of the effect operation used is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process of S75, the effect random number update process is executed (S76), and as various random number values used for the effect control, the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are shown. Numerical data is updated by software. After that, the process returns to the process of S72. The various random value values updated in S76 and used for the effect control include various random value values such as MR6 to MR12 in addition to the random number values for determining the definite symbol described later.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S74 of FIG. 20 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, so that the reception command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is transmitted. It is determined whether or not there is (S501). At this time, if there is no received command (S501; No), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in S501 (S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command (S502). .. Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (S502; Yes), the waiting time for notifying the number of stored storage first is set (S503). For example, in the process of S503, if a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Good.

If the reception command in S502 is not the first start opening prize designation command (S502; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (S504). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (S504; Yes), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (S505). For example, in the process of S505, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in S504 (S504; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (S506). If the reception command is not a symbol designation command in S506 (S506; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a variable category command (S507). If the receive command is not a variable category command in S507 (S507; No), it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command (S508). Then, when the first hold storage number notification command is used (S508; Yes), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared (S509), for example, by initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in S508 (S508; No), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (S510). Then, when the second hold storage number notification command is used (S510; Yes), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared, for example, by initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (S511).

When the receive command is a symbol specification command in S506 (S506; Yes), when the receive command is a variable category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or the processing of S503, S505, S509, or S511 is executed. After that, if the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is sent to the first start winning command buffer 194A. After storing at the beginning of the free area in (S512), the process returns to the process of S501.

Further, either the case where the receive command is a symbol designation command in S506 (S506; Yes), the case where the receive command is a variable category command in S507 (S507; Yes), or the processing of S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing, if the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is sent to the second start winning command. After storing at the beginning of the free area in the buffer 194B (S512), the process returns to the process of S501.

When the first hold storage number notification command is received together with the first fluctuation start command, the hold storage number notification command does not have to be stored in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the first start winning command buffer 194A.

Further, when the second hold storage number notification command is received together with the second fluctuation start command, it is not necessary to store the hold storage number notification command in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the second start winning command buffer 194B.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in S510 (S510; No), the settings are made according to other reception commands (S513), and then the process returns to the process of S501. For example, when the reception command is a game state specification command, the game state specification command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Further, for example, when the reception command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether or not the time is shortened.

Start opening prize designation command (1st start opening prize designation command or 2nd start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, hold storage number notification command (1st hold storage number notification command, 2 hold storage number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start-up prize is generated, such as a notification command), is also referred to as a start-up prize command. Further, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as hold storage information. The symbol designation command and the variable category command are also referred to as determination result information.

When the reception commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning, which of the symbol specification command, the variable category command, and the first hold storage number notification command is stored. It may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of a free area in the corresponding storage area.

Further, when the reception commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the reception command buffer 194B at the time of the second start winning, which of the symbol specification command, the variable category command, and the second hold storage number notification command is stored. It may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of a free area in the corresponding storage area.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S75 of FIG. 20 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the effect determination process at the time of winning (S150). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S150 of FIG. 22 as the effect determination process at the time of winning.

In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the stored contents in the starting winning command buffer (first starting winning command buffer 194A or second starting winning command buffer 194B). The check (S151) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the first start opening winning designation command is received as a new reception command (S152). When it is determined in S152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (S152; No), the stored contents in the second start prize reception command buffer 194B are checked (S153), and as a new reception command, It is determined whether or not the second start opening winning designation command has been received (S153). When it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (S154; No), the winning effect determination process ends.

When it is determined in S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (S152; Yes), when it is specified in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that the time is not shortened (S155). : NO), the first hold effect determination process is executed (S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the first start winning memory display area 5HL is additionally displayed. In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change ghost effect for the hold display when the first start winning memory display area 5HL is additionally displayed, whether to execute the hold change effect or the hold change ghost effect in the step. A process of determining whether or not to perform the hold effect, a process of determining the execution timing of the hold effect when it is determined to execute the hold effect, and the like may be performed.

First, a determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when the first start winning memory display area 5HL is additionally displayed will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of hold display mode determination tables according to the variable category. FIG. 24A shows a hold display mode selected when the variable category “PA1 (shortened / non-reach loss)” or the variable category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” is selected from the above seven types. This is an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table (H-TBL1). FIG. 24B shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss)”) among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 24C shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category “PA4 (super reach α (loss)” is selected among the above seven types. An example (H-TBL3).

FIG. 24 (D) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category “PA5 (super reach β (loss)” is selected among the above seven types. (H-TBL4). FIG. 24 (E) shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category "PB3 (normal reach (big hit))" is selected among the above seven types. It is an example of setting the determination ratio of the aspect (H-TBL5). FIG. 24 (F) is a hold selected when the variable category "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" is selected among the above seven types. It is an example (H-TBL6) of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table. FIG. 24 (G) shows the variation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL7) of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when.

According to FIG. 24, the display mode of the hold display is determined by each of the tables (A) to (G), and the types of the display mode determined are the normal display mode, the first specific display mode, and the first specific display mode. It is roughly classified into three types as the second specific display mode. The usual display mode is "sphere". The first specific display mode is an icon-shaped display mode (also referred to as a character icon) using "characters". The second specific display mode is an icon-shaped display mode (also referred to as a character icon) using a "character" composed of a "humanoid character". Examples of "spheres" are shown in FIGS. 29A-36B. Examples of "character icons" are shown in FIGS. 41 and 43. Examples of "character icons" are shown in FIGS. 41 and 44. Icon-like hold displays such as "character icon" and "character icon" are used for the effect as hold display of a specific display mode different from the normal display mode by a general "sphere".

In the hold display mode determination table of FIG. 24, when the hold display of the hold memory to be determined is determined as the display mode of the character icon, the display mode of the predetermined character icon (for example, the display at the time of appearance consisting of the character "caution") After the hold display is made to appear in the mode), either the hold display mode change effect or the change-corresponding display mode change effect may be executed in response to the hold storage in which the hold display is made. The effect of changing the hold display mode by the character icon is, for example, an effect suggesting that the display mode of the character changes during the hold display after the hold display by the character icon appears and is displayed in the normal display mode (for example, "caution"). This is an effect that suggests that the characters in the normal display mode are changed to the characters in the specific display mode such as "opportunity" or "extreme heat"). The change-corresponding display mode change effect by the character icon suggests that the display mode of the character icon changes in the same manner during the active display (displaying in the active display area AHA) corresponding to the hold display by the character icon, for example. Is. The hold display mode change effect and the variable display mode change effect may be collectively referred to as a display mode change effect. Specific examples of the hold display mode change effect by the character icon and the variation correspondence display mode change effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In the table of FIG. 24, when the hold display of the target hold memory is determined in the display mode of the character icon, the hold display is displayed in the display mode of the predetermined character icon (for example, the display mode at the time of appearance consisting of one character). After the appearance, either the hold display mode change effect or the change-corresponding display mode change effect may be executed in response to the hold memory in which the hold display is performed. The effect of changing the hold display mode by the character icon is, for example, an effect suggesting that the display mode of the character changes during the hold display after the hold display by the character icon appears and is displayed in the normal display mode (for example, one character). This is an effect suggesting that the normal display mode is changed to a specific display mode of two characters or three characters). The variation-corresponding display mode change effect by the character icon is, for example, an effect suggesting that the display mode of the character icon changes in the same manner during the active display corresponding to the hold display. Specific examples of the hold display mode change effect by the character icon and the variation correspondence display mode change effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

The hold display of the "sphere" is displayed as "red sphere", "yellow sphere", "blue sphere", and "white sphere" in each table of FIG. 24. In the hold display of the "sphere", for example, in the case of reach, it is easier to determine red and yellow, and it is difficult to determine blue and white (initial color) as compared with the case of non-reach. Further, in the case of reach, red and yellow are more likely to be determined, and blue and white are less likely to be determined when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) and when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIGS. 16, 17 and 24, when the special figure display result is "big hit", red or yellow is more likely to be determined than when the special figure display result is "missing", and blue or blue. It is difficult to determine the white color. In other words, the red and yellow display modes have a higher expectation that a hot effect will be executed and a big hit than the blue and white display modes. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the expectation that the hot production will be executed and the expectation that it will be a big hit are high.

The display mode of the hold display of the character icon is displayed as "character" in each table of FIG. 24. When it is determined to be "character", the newly added hold display is set to the display mode of the character icon (normal display mode), and the hold is as described above in response to the hold memory in which the hold display is made. Either the display mode change effect or the variation response display mode change effect can be executed.

The display mode of the hold display of the character icon is displayed as "Charakura" in each table of FIG. 24. When it is determined to be a "character", the newly added hold display is set as the character icon display mode (normal display mode), and the hold is held as described above in response to the hold memory in which the hold display is made. Either the display mode change effect or the variation response display mode change effect can be executed.

According to the table of FIG. 24, as is understood by referring to the determination ratio of the random number MR6, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is, the more the hold display by the character icon or the hold display by the character icon is selected. The ratio is high. In this example, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the ratio of the hold display by the character icon being selected rather than the hold display by the character icon.

In the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables shown in FIG. 24 is based on the variation category specified by the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from among them, and based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display, the hold is additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. The display mode of the display (display mode at the time of addition) is determined. As a result, the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL is determined to be one of "sphere", "character icon", and "character icon", and also "sphere". In the case of "", the color is determined.

After executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determined content of the first hold effect determination process based on the decision result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to correspond to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold change effect determination process for the hold display of the "sphere", and if it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the hold change effect is executed. The first start winning command buffer corresponding to the decision content of the decision process (execution timing when executing the hold change effect, execution timing when executing the hold change effect, execution timing when executing the hold change) In association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number in 194A, the decision content of the hold effect determination process (information (for example, a flag) indicating that the hold change effect is executed, and the hold change effect are displayed. Information indicating that the execution is executed (for example, a flag), information indicating that the hold change is executed (for example, a flag), and a hold display that is changed by the hold effect as the hold display of the target (that is, hold due to the first start winning prize). Information that specifies (display) may be stored (for example, the buffer number of the first read-ahead advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning command buffer 194A).

In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning of the third special figure hold memory number, the display mode at the time of addition is "white" and the hold effect is "executed (hold change effect is executed)". When the execution timing is determined as "next fluctuation", the effect control CPU 120 determines the buffer number of the first start winning in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of the first start winning (for example, the buffer number "3". The display mode "white" at the time of addition is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number "3") of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the execution timing "next variation". 1 Receive command at the time of start winning. It is indicated that the hold change effect is executed in association with the buffer number (buffer number "1") of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number "1") in the buffer 194A. The indicated information and the buffer number "3" may be stored.

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the hold change effect is to be executed in the first hold effect determination process for the hold display of the "sphere", the first start corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determination process. Only the information that identifies the target hold display (hold display due to the first start prize) is stored in association with the buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number in the command buffer 194A received at the time of winning. (It is not necessary to store the information indicating that the pending change effect is executed).

After executing the process of S161, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (S160) (buffer of the first start winning in the first start winning command buffer 194A). First hold addition to add a new hold display to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL based on the addition time display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number. The process is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL in the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect is produced. The hold display according to the addition display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL. Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

When it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time is shortened in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S156: YES). ), The second hold effect determination process is executed (S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the second start winning memory display area 5HR is additionally displayed. As a result, the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR is determined to be one of "sphere", "character icon", and "character icon", and also "sphere". In the case of "", the color is determined. In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change ghost effect for the hold display when the second start winning memory display area 5HR is additionally displayed, whether to execute the hold change effect or the hold change ghost effect in the step. A process of determining whether or not to perform the hold effect, a process of determining the execution timing of the hold effect when it is determined to execute the hold effect, and the like may be performed.

The processing of each of S163, S164, and S165 related to the second starting port winning is the same as the processing of each of S160, S161, and S162 related to the first starting opening winning, and the "first" in each step. "Is replaced with" second ", and the code can be replaced in response to the replacement, so the description thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined in S152 that the first start opening winning designation command is received (S152; Yes), and it is specified that the time is shortened in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S155: YES). The effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the initial color (white), and sets the storage content in the first start winning command buffer 194A. The first hold display in the white display mode is added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL in association with the same buffer number as the corresponding buffer number (S166). Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

Further, when it is determined in S154 that the second start opening winning designation command is received (S154; Yes), and it is specified in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 that the time is not shortened (S156: YES). ), The effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR to the normal display (white ball), and in the second start winning command buffer 194B. The second hold display of the display mode of the normal display (white ball) is added to the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored contents (S166). Then, the production determination process at the time of winning is completed.

After executing the winning effect determination process of S150 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, the following S170 to 177 Select one of the processes to execute.

The variable display start waiting process in S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”, which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern specification command, a variable display result notification command, or the like transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative symbol on the display device 5. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. In order to perform variable display and other various effects, the process of determining the fixed decorative symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc., and the active shift of the first hold display or the second hold display. Processing to display a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effect modes of various effects (for example, active display which is the main notice effect). It includes a process of determining a change effect and an effect mode of the active display change effect). After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display during effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process in response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Then, various control data are read out, and various effect controls (for example, variable display control of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol) are performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 and displays it on the screen based on the read control data, and outputs the effect sound signal to the audio control board 13. Then, various effect controls such as control to output the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control to output the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on / off / blink the lamp 9 are executed.

After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. , The final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command elapses, Even if the effect control command from the main board 11 is not used, the effect control board 12 can autonomously derive and display the finalized decorative symbol to confirm the variable display result. When the final decoration symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The special figure hit waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6" corresponding to the effect process during the jackpot. Update to. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. Update to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The small hit medium effect process of S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, reads various control data based on the set content, and changes S172. Similar to the effect processing during display, various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11. ..

The small hit end effect process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, reads various control data based on the set contents, and changes S172. Similar to the effect processing during display, various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

The jackpot effect process of S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot game state, reads various control data based on the set content, and is performing variable display of S172. Similar to the effect processing, various effect controls in the jackpot game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11.

The ending effect processing of S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, reads various control data based on the set contents, and produces an effect during variable display of S172. Similar to the processing, various effect controls at the end of the jackpot game state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an illumination signal, and the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S171 of FIG. 22 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, and the special figure display result is "missed". It is determined whether or not the result is satisfied (S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (S522; Yes), for example, the specified fluctuation pattern is displayed by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-2”, “PA2-3” in FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach”. Whether or not it is determined (S523).

When it is determined in S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (S523; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols serving as the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (S524). As an example, in the process of S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left fixed symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left confirmed symbol determination table or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the left confirmed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

Next, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a right-determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and a predetermined right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is used. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined by referring to the above. In this case, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is used. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined by referring to the above. In the process of S524, it is sufficient to determine the definite decorative symbol of the non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance item symbol in response to the case where the variable symbol advance notice is being executed.

When it is determined in S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (S523; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (S525). As an example, in the process of S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left / right fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left / right finalized symbol determination table or the like, among the finalized decorative symbols, the symbols that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5. Determine decorative patterns with the same number. Further, the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the medium-fixed symbol updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is displayed. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in S522 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (S522; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability", or the special figure display result is "probable". It is determined whether the case is a "small hit" or a case other than these (S526). When it is determined to be "sudden" or "small hit" (S526; Yes), a definite decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "sudden" or "small hit", for example, the opening chance eye. The combination of (S527) is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the chance eye, which is updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is used. It is sufficient to determine the combination of the definite decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes by referring to.

When it is determined in S526 that the combination is "non-probability" or "probability" other than "probability" or "small hit" (S526; No), the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination is determined. (S528). As an example, in the processing of S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot confirmation symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and then a predetermined value stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table, etc., the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 5 Determine decorative patterns with the same number. At this time, it may be decided that a different decorative symbol is used as the final decorative symbol depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable variation" or "probable variation", and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the jackpot.

As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", select one of a plurality of types of normal symbols to determine the definite decorative symbol that constitutes the non-probability variation jackpot combination. Just do it. When the jackpot type is "probability variation", one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols is selected to form a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. You just have to decide. At this time, when the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination is determined, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during the variable display is not performed, and the game is executed in response to the jackpot game state. It suffices to be notified that the probabilistic state is controlled by the promotion effect during the big hit. On the other hand, when the definite decorative symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is determined, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect during the variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect is performed.

When it is specified that the time is not shortened in the process of S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 21 (S155: NO), the hold digestion process is executed after executing any of the processes of S524, S525, S527, and S528. (S531). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed). For example, when the decorative symbol changes in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol this time is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning prize memory display area Display the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL in the active display area AHA (special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the 1st start winning memory display area 5HL. To display). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as the usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 to display the first start prize memory. The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same applies when starting to change the decorative pattern in conjunction with the second special figure game.

Further, in the process of S531, when the effect control CPU 120 has a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, the other hold display is first started. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize memory display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize memory display area 5HR.

After executing the process of S531, the effect execution setting process is executed (S532). In the effect execution setting process (S532), when the hold display is determined to be a "sphere", a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the fluctuation, and when executing the effect display change effect. The process of determining the type of active display change effect, the process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect when it is executed, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when it is executed, and the results of these processes. It includes a process of setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on the effect.

Further, in the effect execution setting process (S532), when the newly appearing and displayed hold display is determined to be an icon-shaped display mode such as a character icon or a character icon, the display mode change effect execution timing selection process, It further includes a display mode change effect type selection process, an icon effect setting process for executing the change mode selection process, and a process for setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on the processing results.

The display mode change effect execution timing selection process is the execution timing of the display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or change corresponding display mode change effect) corresponding to the hold storage displayed in the icon shape of the character icon or the character icon. Is a process of selecting and determining. As shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the execution timing of such a hold display is, for example, during the hold display after the first hold display shift after the hold display corresponding to the hold storage appears. Is selected and determined as either the timing of the above or the timing during active display corresponding to the hold storage.

The display mode change effect type selection process selects and determines the type of the display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or variable display mode change effect) of the icon shape of "character" or "character". It is a process. As shown in FIGS. 26 (D) and 26 (E), the type of such display mode change effect is selected and determined as one of the first change effect to the fourth change effect.

The change mode selection process selects and determines the display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or change-corresponding display mode change effect) of the display of the icon shape of the "character" or "character". It is a process. As shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M), the display mode of the character icon display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or change response display mode change effect) is displayed as "no change" and "opportunity". And "Intense heat" display are selected and decided. The effect mode of the character icon display mode change effect (hold display mode change effect or change response display mode change effect) is selected and determined as either "no change", "2 person" display, or "3 person" display. To.

After executing the process of S532, the execution setting of the effect during other variable display is performed (S533). As an example, in the process of S533, the execution setting of the "one-shot notification effect" that immediately notifies (determinically notifies) that the variable display result becomes the "big hit" by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission may be set. .. Examples of jackpot notification sounds are alarm sounds, chime sounds, siren sounds, and the like. An example of the jackpot notification light emission is the light emission of the flash lamp constituting the light emitting member 9CC. Further, in the process of S533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", the effect of a predetermined mode may be executed, for example, for liveliness. For example, the effect may be set so that a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, the light emitting member 9SL, 9SR) emits light.

After executing the process of S533, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (S534). Subsequently, a variation display or the like start setting process for setting to start the variation of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (S535). For example, an image display device by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which is included in the effect control pattern set as the effect pattern used in the effect execution setting process of S532. The audio output of the speaker 8 is output by setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of 5 and transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the audio control data included in the effect control pattern to the audio control board 13. Settings for starting the light emission of the lamp 9 are made by transmitting an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14 and the like.

After executing the process of S535, the command stored in the first start winning command buffer 194A or the second starting winning command buffer 194B is digested (S536). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is the smallest of the commands associated with the first start winning command buffer 194A when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (1st start opening winning designation command) The command associated with is shifted while maintaining the winning order. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning command buffer. The commands (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands are deleted, and the commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command are awarded. Shift while maintaining the order.

Further, in the process of S536, the information stored in the first lookahead advance notice buffer 194C or the second lookahead advance notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. After that, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S537), the variable display start setting process ends.

Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the fluctuation, and a process of determining the type of active display change effect when it is determined to execute an active display change effect (which active) The process of determining whether to execute the display change effect) will be described.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a hold selection effect pattern table. In particular, FIG. 26A shows an example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. Further, FIGS. 26 (B) to 26 (M) show a display mode change effect execution timing selection process and a display mode change effect type selection when the hold display is determined to be an icon shape display mode such as a character icon or a character icon. These are various data tables used for the icon effect setting process for executing the process and the change mode selection process.

Specifically, in the setting example of FIG. 26A, whether or not to execute the active display change effect when the display mode of the hold display is determined to be "sphere" and the type of the active display change effect (which). This is an example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed. In the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect are "executed" and "executed not". Are assigned to each of the above at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Further, in the "execution enabled" of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determination are "first system change effect" and " The "second system change effect" and the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" are allotted at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 26 (A). In addition, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that acts on the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that acts on the display mode of the active display frame. The target that acts on the second system change effect is different.

In addition, "execution available" and "first system change effect" indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and "execution available" and "second system change effect" indicate the second system change effect. "Execution Yes" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" indicate that the active display change effect is performed, and the active display change of both the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect. Indicates that it will be performed as a production. In addition, "no execution" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

According to FIG. 26 (A), when the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (the variable display) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "no execution". "Is 100%, which means that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the fluctuation is non-reach (loss), it means that the active display change effect is not executed.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X are used. Compared to some cases, the rate at which "no execution" is determined is low. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when a "big hit" occurs in the fluctuation is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the "loss" occurs in the change. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of becoming a "big hit" is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns are PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the ratio of "first system change effect and second system change effect" when "execution available" is determined is higher. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, when "execution" is determined, the ratio of "first system change effect and second system change effect" determined is about 57% (40/70). On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA3-X, when "execution" is determined, the ratio of "first system change effect and second system change effect" is determined is about 33% (10/30). Is. Alternatively, more specifically, whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is any of the fluctuation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X or the fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) of the ratio at which the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" is determined is that the variation pattern of the variation specified by the variation pattern specification command is the variation pattern PA3-X to PA5-. It is larger than the difference in the ratio at which the "first system change effect" or the "second system change effect" is determined depending on which of the X and the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, the rate at which "first system change effect and second system change effect" are determined when the variation pattern PB3-X is used, and "first system change effect and second system change effect" when the variation pattern PA3-X is used. The difference from the ratio at which "directing" is determined is 30% (40% -10%), whereas the ratio at which "first system change directing" is determined and the fluctuation pattern when the fluctuation pattern PB3-X is used. The difference from the ratio at which the "first system change effect" is determined when PA3-X is 5% (15% -10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of becoming a "big hit" is higher than when it is not.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns are PA3-X and PB3-X. Compared to the case, the rate at which "no execution" is determined is low. That is, the ratio of the active display change effect being executed when the super reach is reached in the fluctuation is higher than the ratio of the active display change effect being executed when the normal reach is achieved in the fluctuation. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of becoming super reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of super reach is higher than when it is not.

FIG. 26B is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. In FIG. 26B, the selection of the relationship that the random number value MR10 for determining the display mode change effect timing is “pending display> active display” at the two types of display mode change effect timings, that is, the hold display and the active display. It is allocated by percentage.

FIG. 26C is a character hold display change effect timing selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. In FIG. 26C, the random value MR10 for selecting the display mode change effect timing is set to the selection ratio of the relationship “hold display <active display” at the two types of change effect timings of the hold display and the active display. It has been allocated.

According to FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the hold display is more active than the active display as compared with the character icon display mode. However, the ratio of the display mode change effect is high. On the other hand, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the rate at which the display mode change effect is executed in the active display than in the hold display as compared with the case where the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Is high. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to the display type (for example, the display type of the character icon and the character icon) and the timing of the display mode change (for example, the timing of the hold display and the active display) of the display mode change effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

Regarding the display of the character icon and the display of the character icon, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M) described later, the rate at which the display mode actually changes after the display mode change effect is executed is held. Equal between medium and active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode change effect is executed at a higher rate in the hold display than in the active display as compared with the display mode of the character icon. When the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode change effect is executed at a higher rate during the active display than when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon. Based on, the frequency at which the icon display mode changes between the hold display and the active display differs depending on whether the hold display is displayed as a character icon display or a character icon display. The ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode is different between the hold display and the active display. As a result, with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the change in the display mode of the active display, the player can pay attention to the display type of the change target and the timing of the change in the display mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game about the change of.

FIG. 26 (D) is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. As the type of change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, the blue arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display (sometimes referred to as the blue effect) as the first change effect. , A second change effect in which a red arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display (sometimes referred to as a red effect) is provided so as to be selectable. The selection ratio of the icon display change mode after the display mode change effect is executed differs between the first change effect and the second change effect. For example, the second change effect (red effect) is the first change effect (blue effect). ), The selection rate of the change mode with a higher expectation of a big hit is set higher (see FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I)). In FIG. 26 (D), the random value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type is allocated to the first change effect and the second change effect by the selection ratio of the relationship “first change effect = second change effect”. Has been done.

FIG. 26 (E) is a character hold change effect type selection table used when the hold display is determined to be the display mode of the character icon. As a type of display mode change effect when the hold display by the character icon is executed, a blue arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display (sometimes referred to as a blue effect). An effect and a fourth change effect in which a red arrow as shown in FIG. 42 acts on the hold display or the active display (sometimes referred to as a red effect) are provided so as to be selectable. The selection ratio of the icon display change mode after the display mode change effect is executed differs between the third change effect and the fourth change effect. For example, the fourth change effect (red effect) is the third change effect (blue effect). ), The selection rate of the change mode with a higher expectation of a big hit is set higher (see FIGS. 26 (J) to 26 (M)). In FIG. 26 (E), the random value MR11 for selecting the display mode change effect type is allocated to the third change effect and the fourth change effect by the selection ratio of the relationship “third change effect = fourth change effect”. Has been done.

26 (F) to 26 (I) show the display mode change effect timing and display mode selected and determined by the data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (D) for the change effect of the hold display by the character icon. This is a change selection table used when selecting and determining a change mode of icon display according to a combination with a change effect type. In these change selection tables, the change mode is divided into "no change", "opportunity" display, and "extreme heat" display when the display result of the variation display is the jackpot display result and when it is the loss display result. Random values MR12 for selection are assigned at different selection ratios.

FIG. 26 (F) shows the first change effect pending display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being displayed on hold and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the first change effect. is there. FIG. 26 (G) shows the first change effect active display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined for the first change effect. is there. FIG. 26 (H) shows the second change effect hold display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during the hold display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined for the second change effect. is there. FIG. 26 (I) shows the second change effect active display change selection table used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during the active display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined for the second change effect. is there.

In FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I), "no change" indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and "opportunity" display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to the icon of the character "opportunity". The "hot heat" display indicates that the character icon changes to the character icon of the character "hot heat".

In FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I), when the random value MR12 for change selection is the jackpot display result, “no change <opportunity + intense heat (changed)”, and when the loss display result is “change”. It is allocated by the selection ratio of the relationship "None> Opportunity + intense heat (with change)". Further, in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I), the random number value MR12 is determined by the selection ratio of the relationship of "opportunity <extreme heat" when the jackpot display result is obtained and "opportunity> intense heat" when the loss display result is obtained. It has been allocated. As a result, when the character icon changes, the expectation that the jackpot display result is higher is higher than when the character icon does not change. In addition, when the character icon changes to "super heat", the expectation that the jackpot display result is higher is higher than when the character icon changes to "opportunity".

In FIGS. 26 (G) and 26 (I) used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined during the active display when the character icon is displayed on hold, the display mode change effect timing is selected during the hold display. Compared with FIGS. 26 (F) and 26 (H) used when the determination is made, the selection ratio of the “super heat” display is set higher when the jackpot display result is obtained.

With such a setting, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), for the character icon display, the ratio of selecting the character icon display mode change during the active display is lower than that during the hold display. When the jackpot display result is obtained, the ratio of the display mode change that becomes the "super heat" display, which has a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the "opportunity" display, is selected as compared with the hold display during the active display. high. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the mode of changing the display mode of the icon display depending on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I), when the jackpot display result is obtained, the second change effect (red effect) is more “opportunity or intense” than the first change effect (blue effect). The rate of "heat (changed)" is high. As a result, when the second change effect (red effect) displays "opportunity or intense heat (changed)", the first change effect (blue effect) displays "opportunity or intense heat (changed)". Compared to the time when the jackpot is displayed, the expectation for the jackpot display result is higher, and the player's expectation for the jackpot can be increased.

In addition, because the ratio of "opportunity or intense heat (changed)" is displayed differently between the first change effect (blue effect) and the second change effect (red effect), the icon display is on hold. Alternatively, the player can be made to pay attention to the change mode during the active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

26 (J) to 26 (M) show the display mode change effect timing of the hold display by the character icon, which is selected and determined by the data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (D). This is a change selection table used when selecting and determining a change mode of icon display according to a combination with a display mode change effect type. In these effect selection tables, when the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result and when it becomes the loss display result, it changes to "no change", "2 people" display, and "3 people" display. Random values MR12 for selection are assigned at different selection ratios.

FIG. 26 (J) is a third change effect pending display change selection table used when the change effect timing is selected and determined as being displayed on hold and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the third change effect. FIG. 26 (K) shows the change selection table during the third change effect active display used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined for the third change effect. is there. FIG. 26 (L) shows the change selection table during the fourth change effect hold display, which is used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being displayed on hold and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined as the fourth change effect. is there. FIG. 26 (M) shows the change selection table during the fourth change effect active display used when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display and the display mode change effect type is selected and determined for the fourth change effect. is there.

In FIGS. 26 (J) to 26 (M), "no change" indicates a mode in which the character icon does not change, and "two people" display indicates a mode in which the character icon changes to a "two person" icon. The "three people" display indicates that the character changes to a "three people" icon.

In FIGS. 26 (J) to 26 (M), when the random value MR12 for change selection is the jackpot display result, “no change <2 + 3 people (changed)”, and when the loss display result is “change”. It is allocated by the selection ratio of the relationship "None> 2 + 3 (with change)". Further, in 26 (J) to (M), the random number value MR12 is selected by the selection ratio of "2 people <3 people" when the jackpot display result is obtained and "2 people> 3 people" when the loss display result is obtained. Is allocated. As a result, when the character icon changes, the degree of expectation that the jackpot display result is higher is higher than when the character icon does not change. Further, when the character icon changes to "3 people", the degree of expectation that the jackpot display result is higher is higher than when the character icon changes to "2 people".

In FIGS. 26 (J) and 26 (L) used when the change effect timing is selected and determined during the hold display when the hold display is performed by the character icon, when the change effect timing is selected and determined during the hold display. Compared with FIGS. 26 (K) and 26 (M) used in FIG. 26, the selection ratio of "3 people" display is set higher when the jackpot display result is obtained.

With such a setting, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), for the character icon display, the ratio of selecting the character icon display mode change during the hold display is lower than that during the active display. When the jackpot display result is obtained, the rate at which the display mode change of "3 people" display, which has a higher expectation level of jackpot than "2 people" display, is selected as compared with the active display during hold display. Is high. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the mode of changing the display mode of the icon display depending on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 (J) to 26 (M), when the jackpot display result is obtained, the fourth change effect (red effect) is more "two people" than the third change effect (blue effect). Or 3 people (changed) ”is displayed at a high rate. As a result, when "2 or 3 people (with change)" is displayed by the 4th change effect (red effect), "2 or 3 people (with change)" is displayed by the 3rd change effect (blue effect). Compared to when the display is made, the expectation of the big hit display result is high, and the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

In addition, because the ratio of "2 or 3 people (with change)" displayed differs between the 3rd change effect (blue effect) and the 4th change effect (red effect), the icon display is on hold. Alternatively, the player can be made to pay attention to the change mode during the active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Here, returning to FIG. 25 again, the variable display start setting process will be continued. In the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 may select the hold display by the character icon or the character icon from the hold display mode determination table of FIG. 24 as the newly appearing and displayed hold display. Occasionally, for example, as described with reference to FIGS. 26 (B) to 26 (M), a process for realizing a display mode change effect with the effect content selected and determined is executed. For example, when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as being on hold display according to FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C), in the variable display to be started from now on, after the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion, As described above, the setting process for executing the display mode change effect with the effect content selected and determined is performed.

On the other hand, in the effect execution setting process (S532), when the display mode change effect timing is selected and determined as active display according to FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C), the active display corresponding to the hold memory to be produced is displayed. Is executed, the data specifying the effect content selected and determined as described above is associated with the buffer number data in the first start winning command buffer 194A corresponding to the hold storage to be produced. , Display mode change effect The display mode change provided in the RAM 122 stores the data for specifying the change effect designation data during active display that specifies that the display mode change effect is to be executed, and also stores the data for specifying the effect content selected and determined as described above. Store in the production storage area. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display to be started in S532 of the effect execution setting process is a variable display corresponding to the hold storage of the effect target designated by the change effect designation data during active display. Is determined, and when it is determined that the display is a variable display corresponding to the hold storage of the effect target, the display mode is changed. Let the production be executed.

By executing the process as described above, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the display mode of the hold display is selected by the character icon or the character icon, and when the display mode change effect is executed, the display mode is concerned. The effect execution setting process (S532) during the first hold display after the hold display to be changed appears, or during the active display when the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is executed. Based on the effect setting in, the display mode change effect is executed.

Further, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 sets the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table and the random number value MR7 for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect for the hold display displayed by the “sphere”. Depending on the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (the variable display) specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when the active display change effect is executed, It is determined which of the plurality of active display change effect effect modes is to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined that the active display change effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the active display change effect is executed. And any of the second system change effect "may be determined.

Next, a process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed in the case of the active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect will be described. FIG. 27A is a diagram showing an example of setting a determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 27B is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. Further, FIG. 27C shows the determination ratio of the effect modes of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the setting example.

In the illustrated example, the variation pattern 1-X represents the variation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA2-X is any of the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The variation pattern PA3-X represents any of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 is the variation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4 shown in FIG. Represents any of -3 and PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the active display change effect pattern as the effect mode of the first system change effect according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores an active display change effect pattern as an effect mode of three types of second system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. Further, the ROM 21 stores 12 types of first system change effects and active display change effect patterns as effect modes of the second system change effects according to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. To do.

The first system change effect is an action effect that incites a change in the display mode of the active display for the active display, and is, for example, an action effect that incites a change in the display shape of the active display. In FIG. 27 (A), in the active display change effect pattern "BP1", assuming that the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is "sphere" by default, the display shape of the active display is "sphere". This is a production pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect) that does not change as it is. According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is a "big hit".

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP2" is a successful effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "triangle". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB4-1) which is "big hit". high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP3" is an effect of success effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "pentagon". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern becomes a “big hit” (for example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1) which becomes a “loss”. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP4" is an effect of success effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "star". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern becomes a "big hit" (for example, the fluctuation pattern PB5-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern PA5-1) which becomes a "loss".

The second system change effect is an action effect that incites a change in the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, and is, for example, an action effect that incites a change in the line thickness of the active display frame. In FIG. 27 (B), assuming that the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is "normal" by default, the active display change effect pattern "CP1" is the active display frame. This is a production pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect) that does not change the line thickness of the line as "normal". According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is a "big hit".

Further, the active display change effect pattern "CP2" is an effect pattern of a success effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display from "normal" to "medium thickness". According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB4-1) which is "big hit". high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

Further, the active display change effect pattern "CP3" is an effect pattern of a success effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the fluctuation from "normal" to "extremely thick". According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit" (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1) which is "missing". high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The first system change effect and the second system change effect are an action effect that incites a change in the display mode of the active display by the above-mentioned first system change effect, and an active display that surrounds the active display by the above-mentioned second system change effect. It is an action effect that incites a change in the display mode of the frame and an action effect that performs both. In FIG. 27 (C), in the active display change effect pattern "AP1", by default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is "sphere", and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display. Assuming that is "normal", the display shape of the active display remains "sphere" and the line thickness of the active display frame remains "normal", which is a failure effect (active display change effect). It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is a "big hit".

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "AP2" succeeds in changing the display shape of the active display from "normal" to "medium thickness" while keeping the display shape of the active display as "sphere" and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the fluctuation pattern is "missing" (for example, fluctuation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB4-1) which is "big hit". high. Further, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach).

In addition, the active display change effect pattern "AP3" is a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display remains "sphere" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from "normal" to "extremely thick". It is a production pattern of. When the fluctuation pattern becomes a "big hit" (for example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1) which becomes a "loss". Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

The active display change effect pattern "AP4" is an effect pattern in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as "normal", and the active display change. The effect pattern "AP5" is an effect pattern in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "medium thickness", and the active display change effect pattern "AP5" is used. "AP6" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "triangle" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "extremely thick".

Further, the active display change effect pattern "AP7" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to a "pentagon" and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as "normal". The display change effect pattern "AP8" is an effect pattern in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "pentagon" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "medium thickness", and the active display change effect is produced. The pattern "AP9" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "pentagon" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "extremely thick".

Further, the active display change effect pattern "AP10" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "star" and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as "normal", and is active. The display change effect pattern "AP11" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "star" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "medium thickness", and the active display change effect is produced. The pattern "AP12" is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to "star" and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to "extremely thick".

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 has the random value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the variation pattern (variable) of the variation (the variable display) specified by the variation pattern designation command. The active display change effect pattern is determined as the effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

Next, a process of determining the timing for executing the active display change effect in the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect. It should be noted that the ROM 121 stores a plurality (for example, four) execution timings of the first system change effect according to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the effect execution timing of the first system change effect. And. The timing 1 is, for example, the timing to execute the first system change effect at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation, the timing 2 is the timing to execute the first system change effect at the time of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and the timing 3 is. , The timing of executing the first system change effect when the reach is established in the fluctuation, and the timing 4 is the timing of executing the first system change effect after the reach is established (during reach) in the fluctuation. The pseudo-continuous fluctuation is, for example, a time when the variable display during the fluctuation is temporarily stopped.

Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified into "success expectation degree" small "" indicate that the expectation degree for executing the success effect is "small", and "success expectation degree" medium "". The fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 classified into "" are "medium" in which the expectation that the success effect is executed is higher than the above-mentioned success expectation "small". Represents. In addition, the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified as "success expectation" large "" indicate that the expectation that the success effect is executed is "large", which is higher than the success expectation "medium". In the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are classified as "success expectation" maximum "", the expectation that the success effect is executed is the above-mentioned success expectation "large". Indicates that it is higher than "maximum".

Specifically, in FIG. 27, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are the active display change effect pattern BP1 which is the failure effect of the first system change effect and the active display which is the failure effect of the second system change effect. The ratio determined for the change effect pattern CP1 and the active display change effect pattern AP1 which is the failure effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is compared with the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. It is high, and the success expectation that the success production can be executed is low, and it is classified into "success expectation" small "" as described above.

Further, in FIG. 27, fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. In PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4, which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3, which are successful effects of the second system change effect, and The ratio determined for the active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which are the successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, is higher than the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. , The degree of success expectation that the success effect can be executed is higher than that of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, it is highly expected that the success effect can be executed by the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 27.

In the illustrated example, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (the variable display) specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is not a pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and the fluctuation patterns PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5 -1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, and PB5-2 indicate that the first system change effect is not executed at timing 2. According to FIG. 28, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "big hit", the determination ratio determined at the later timing (for example, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern of "loss". Further, after the reach is established (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the degree of expectation of successful production is higher than before the reach is established (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). Further, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo-continuous variation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of success effect is higher than that before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo-continuous variation (for example, timing 1).

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 has the random value MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the variation pattern of the variation (the variable display) specified by the variation pattern designation command. (Variable display pattern) determines the execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

At timing 2, immediately after the start of the revariable display, for example, at the start of the first revariable display or at the start of the second revariable display, depending on the number of temporary stops of the variable display in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at a plurality of execution timings in a plurality of pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Further, the timing 2 at the time of pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be after the reach is established. For example, the execution timing is set so as to set the timing 2 at the time of pseudo-continuous fluctuation after the timing 3 at the time of establishment of reach in FIG. 28. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

Further, an example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 27 and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. 28. The ROM 121 may be stored as one table in association with the above. The execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are the same.

The example of setting the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect (not shown) is the example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect as shown in FIG. 28. It may be the same, and may be an example of setting the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, which is different from the example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect.

When it is determined in FIG. 26 to execute the "first system change effect and the second system change effect", the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 28. Using an example of setting the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be collectively determined to be executed at the same timing, and the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be executed at the same time. It may be decided collectively so that each execution timing with the system change effect may be different execution timing. Further, when it is determined in FIG. 26 to execute the "first system change effect and the second system change effect", the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 28. The execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined separately by using an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table.

Next, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, and when the active display change effect is executed, the active display change effect is executed. The effect pattern of the effect and the execution timing of the active display change effect are set as the effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as the effect control pattern, and also sets the effect corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as an effect control pattern. If a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the variation patterns specified by the variation pattern specification command are prepared, one of them is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (S532) is completed.

Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.
On the side of the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first hold storage number, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 has the second hold storage number. Is updated (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR3 for determining a variable category (S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the like (S403, S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result which is the determination result, the reserved storage number updated in S215, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in S217 (S412). The CPU 103 that has determined the variable category sets the transmission of the variable category command that specifies the variable category that is the determination result (S413), and executes the command control process (S17). As a result, the fluctuation category command or the like for designating the fluctuation category determined in S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Further, on the side of the main board 11, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S111), first, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category extracted in S217. Is not used, the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category is extracted again, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the newly extracted numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the variation pattern sets the transmission of the variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern that is the determination result, and executes the command control process (S17). As a result, the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like for designating the fluctuation pattern determined in S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start prize memory display area 5HL or the second start prize in the hold effect determination process (S160). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the storage display area 5HR is additionally displayed is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 transfers the determined content of the hold effect determination process (for example, display mode at the time of addition) to the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C or the second pre-reading advance notice buffer based on the determination result of the hold effect determination process. In addition to being stored (S161), a hold display is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL or the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR based on the stored contents (display mode at the time of addition) (S162).

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C or the second pre-reading advance notice buffer 194D, and in the variable display, the main The effect control pattern is set based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the board 11.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIGS. 29A (A) and (e) of FIG. 29B (A) show the scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 29 (B) and (e) of FIG. 29B (B). In addition, in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 29A (A) and 29B (A) show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that (variable (thickness "extremely thick")) is set. Further, FIGS. 29A (B) and 29B (B) represent a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that (no change (thickness "normal")) is set.

FIG. 29A (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started. Alternatively, a special image (representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. It is a scene. Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, in the lower center of the image display device 5. At least the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA, and in addition to the active display AH, a predetermined range including an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH and an active display frame AHW is included. It is also possible to display characters and images in the active display area AHA such as the active display AH itself or the inside or outside of the active display frame AHW.

Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 29A (A), it is held and displayed in the buffer number "1" of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C (active display AH). The display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to, and the first pre-reading notice is given. In the buffer number "2" of the buffer 194C, the display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number "3" of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C is the display mode of the hold display H2 determined at the time of starting and winning the hold display H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2 (display mode "white" at the time of addition). ) Is stored, and the buffer number "4" of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of starting and winning the hold display H3 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3 (at the time of addition). It is assumed that the display mode "white") is stored.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 29A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 started the variation of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern "PA2-1 (non-reach (loss)"" specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed. From the scene (a) of FIG. 29A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first hold storage number to "4". Is updated (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR3 for determining a variable category (S217), and disturbs the determination of a special figure display result. The special figure display result is determined by using the numerical value MR1 or the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S403, S404).

For example, it is assumed that "missing" is determined as the result of displaying the special figure. The CPU 103 selects the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" from the plurality of variable category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result "loss" and the number of reserved storages "4" (FIG. 16). ), The variable category is determined based on the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" and the random value MR3 for determining the variable category (S412). For example, it is assumed that the variable category "PB5 (super reach β (big hit))" is determined. The CPU 103 sets the transmission of the variable category command that specifies the variable category "PB5" (S413), and executes the command control process (S17) to specify the variable category "PB5". Is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the variable category command or the like for designating the variable category from the main board 11 uses the hold display mode from among the plurality of hold display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variable category. A decision table is selected, and a hold display display mode is additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the hold display display mode (at the time of addition). Display mode) is determined. The effect control CPU 120 determines the hold effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the command buffer 194A received at the time of the first start prize. Store the content (display mode at the time of addition).

In the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and holds the display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 29A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation that executes the second system change effect. FIG. 29A (c) shows the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28) in the scene of FIG. 29A (b). This is an example. In FIG. 29A (c), an arrow Y2 on which the characters “extreme heat” are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. (A) of FIG. 29A (B) to (c) of FIG. 29A (B) are also the same as (c) of FIGS. 29A (A) to 29A (A). That is, the second system change from (b) in FIG. 29A (A) to (c) in FIG. 29A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 29A (B) to (c) in FIG. 29A (B). It is a common production that is executed in common by the success production and the failure production in the production.

Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is "extremely thick". The display mode of is changing. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (A), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 29A (B), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the arrow Y2 disappeared without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 29A (B), so that the line thickness of the active display frame AHW became thicker. The display mode of "normal" has not changed. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 29B (B), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIGS. 30A (A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (A) are scenes arranged in time series in the image display device 5. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 30 (B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 30B (B). In addition, in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 30A (A) and 30B (A) show the success effect of the first system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in FIG. 27 (A). It is assumed that (changed (shape "star")) is set. 30A (B) and 30B (B) show the failure effect of the first system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern BP1 (change) shown in FIG. 27 (A). It is assumed that nothing (shape "sphere")) is set.

FIG. 30A (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started. Alternatively, a special image (representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 30A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 started the variation of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern "PA2-1 (non-reach (loss)"" specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area in the active display area AHA, and holds the display. This is an example when the variable display of the active display AH corresponding to H1 is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation that executes the first system change effect. The scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A) is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started (for example, the timing 1 of FIG. 28). In FIG. 30A (b), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect.

Then, in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (b) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene in which the triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. In the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (A), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves from the scene of (c) of FIG. 30A (A) toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the figure Of the stars Z1 and the pentagons Z3 that make up the group Y1, the pentagons Z3 have disappeared and only the stars Z1 continue to move. (A) of FIG. 30A (B) to (d) of FIG. 30A (B) are also the same as (a) of FIG. 30A (A) to (d) of FIG. 30A (A). That is, the first system change changes from (b) in FIG. 30A (A) to (d) in FIG. 30A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 30A (B) to (d) in FIG. 30A (B). It is a common production that is executed in common by the success production and the failure production in the production.

Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (A) This is a scene in which the image display device 5 is further moved toward the lower part and collides with the active display AH. In the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (A), after the star Z1 remaining in the figure group Y1 without disappearing collides with the active display AH in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (A), the active display AH is displayed. It is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape is changed to "star". Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 30A (B) This is a scene in which the image display device 5 moves further toward the lower part, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. In the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the star Z1 remaining in the active display AH without disappearing in the figure group Y1 disappeared without colliding with the active display AH in the scene (e) of FIG. 30B (B). The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode as it is "sphere". Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 30B (B), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIGS. 31A (A) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B (A) are scenes arranged in time series in the image display device 5. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 31 (B) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 31B (B). In addition, in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 31A (A) and 31B (A) show the successful production of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 27 (C) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (changed (thickness "extremely thick"), changed (shape "star")) is set. 31A (B) and 31B (B) represent the failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. 27 (C) as an effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape "sphere"), no change (thickness "normal")) is set.

FIG. 31A (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started. Alternatively, a special image (representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 31A (A), variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 started the variation of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern "PA2-1 (non-reach (loss)"" specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. This is an example when the variable display of AH is started.

In the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. This is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation that executes the second system change effect. In FIG. 31A (c), the first system change effect and the second system change effect are shown immediately after the variable display is started in the scene (b) of FIG. 31A (A) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 28). Is an example when is executed. In (c) of FIG. 31A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change. As an effect, an arrow Y2 on which the characters "extreme heat" are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. (A) of FIG. 31A (B) to (c) of FIG. 31A (B) are also the same as (c) of FIGS. 31A (A) to 31A (A). That is, the first system change from (b) of FIG. 31A (A) to (c) of FIG. 31A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 31A (B) to (c) of FIG. 31A (B) It is a common production that is executed in common by the success production and the failure production in the production and the second system change production.

Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 30A (A) is directed toward the lower part of the image display device 5. The triangle Z2 disappears while moving, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. Further, a scene in which the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW. Is. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW becomes ". It has changed as a display mode of "extremely thick". Further, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (A), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (d) of FIG. 31A (A). This is a scene in which the pentagon Z3 disappears from the stars Z1 and the pentagon Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, and only the star Z1 continues to move.

Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 30A (A) This is a scene in which the image display device 5 is further moved toward the lower part and collides with the active display AH. In the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (A), after the star Z1 remaining in the figure group Y1 without disappearing collides with the active display AH in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (A), the active display AH is displayed. It is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape is changed to "star". Then, in the scene (g) of FIG. 30B (A), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 31A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A (B), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. Further, in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (d) of FIG. 31A (B). This is a scene in which the pentagon Z3 disappears from the stars Z1 and the pentagon Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, and only the star Z1 continues to move. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (e) of FIG. 31A (B) This is a scene in which the image display device 5 moves further toward the lower part, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. In the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the star Z1 remaining in the active display AH without disappearing in the figure group Y1 disappeared without colliding with the active display AH in the scene (f) of FIG. 31B (B). The display shape of the display AH is displayed in a display mode as it is "sphere". Further, in the scene (g) of FIG. 31B (B), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIGS. 32A (A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (A) are scenes arranged in time series in the image display device 5. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 32 (B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 32B (B). In addition, in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 32A (A) and 32B (A) show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that (variable (thickness "extremely thick")) is set. Further, FIGS. 32A (B) and 32B (B) represent a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that (no change (thickness "normal")) is set.

FIG. 32A (a) shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started. Alternatively, a special image (representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. It is a scene.

Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 32A (A), it is held and displayed in the buffer number "1" of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C (active display AH). The display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to the first pre-reading notice. In the buffer number "2" of the buffer 194C, the display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number "3" of the first pre-reading notice buffer 194C is the display mode of the hold display H2 determined at the time of starting and winning the hold display H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2 (display mode "white" at the time of addition). ) Is stored, and the buffer number "4" of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of starting and winning the hold display H3 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3 (at the time of addition). It is assumed that the display mode "white") is stored.

In the scene (a) of FIG. 32A (A), the variable display of the active information of the active display AH (information corresponding to the pending information immediately before the active display AH is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA) is started. At that time, the effect control CPU 120 started the variation of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern "PA2-1 (non-reach (loss)"" specified by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. After that, the fixed decorative symbols ("3", "9", "4") are stopped and displayed. From the scene (a) of FIG. 32A (A), when one game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first hold storage number to "4". Is updated (S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random value MR3 for determining a variable category (S217), and disturbs the determination of a special figure display result. The special figure display result is determined by using the numerical value MR1 or the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (S403, S404).

For example, it is assumed that "missing" is determined as the result of displaying the special figure. The CPU 103 selects the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" from the plurality of variable category determination tables (FIG. 17) based on the special figure display result "loss" and the number of reserved storages "4" (FIG. 16). ), The variable category is determined based on the variable category determination table "C-TBL3" and the random value MR3 for determining the variable category (S412). For example, it is assumed that the variable category "PB5 (super reach β (big hit))" is determined. The CPU 103 sets the transmission of the variable category command that specifies the variable category "PB5" (S413), and executes the command control process (S17) to specify the variable category "PB5". Is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the variable category command or the like for designating the variable category from the main board 11 uses the hold display mode from among the plurality of hold display mode determination tables as shown in FIG. 24 based on the variable category. A decision table is selected, and a hold display display mode is additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the hold display display mode (at the time of addition). Display mode) is determined. The effect control CPU 120 determines the hold effect determination process in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the command buffer 194A received at the time of the first start prize. Store the content (display mode at the time of addition).

In the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. This is an example when the variable display of AH is started. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), it is assumed that the active display AH is a variation that executes the second system change effect. In FIG. 32A (c), the reach is established after the variable display is started in the scene (b) of FIG. 32A (A), and the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol display area 5R of the decorative symbol display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative pattern is in the reach mode. The scene (d) of FIG. 32A (A) is an example when the second system change effect is executed after the reach is established (for example, the timing 3 of FIG. 28). In (d) of FIG. 32A (A), an arrow Y2 on which the characters "extreme heat" are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. (A) of FIG. 32A (B) to (d) of FIG. 32A (B) are also the same as (a) of FIG. 32A (A) to (d) of FIG. 32A (A). That is, the second system change from (b) in FIG. 32A (A) to (d) in FIG. 32A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 32A (B) to (d) in FIG. 32A (B). It is a common production that is executed in common by the success production and the failure production in the production.

Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (A), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is "extremely thick". The display mode of is changing.

On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 32A (B), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Then, it is a scene of moving to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (f) of FIG. 32B (B), the arrow Y2 disappeared without colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 32A (B), so that the line thickness of the active display frame AHW became thicker. The display mode of "normal" has not changed. Similarly, for the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established. Further, in the first system change effect and the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 33A and (g) to (h) in FIG. 33B are time-series arrangements of the scenes in the image display device 5. In addition, in FIGS. 33A and 33B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 33A and 33B show a successful effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness)) shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that "extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B are different in that they are pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Other than that, it is the same, so the explanation will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect will be omitted.

FIG. 33A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or the relevant display. A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 33A (c), the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are the reach modes after the variable display is started in the scene (b) in FIG. 32A (A). This is a scene in which the display is stopped in a different display mode. In the scene (d) of FIG. 33A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the image display device 5 by slow scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene (e) of FIG. 33A. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 33A, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display) again.

In FIG. 33B (g), an arrow Y2 on which the characters “extreme heat” are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. (A) of FIG. 33A to (g) of FIG. 33B are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 33B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 33B (g), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW It is a scene that is colliding with. In the scene (i) of FIG. 33B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (h) of FIG. 33B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick". ing. Further, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed as the "extremely thick" display mode, the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 34A and (g) to (j) of FIG. 34B are time-series arrangements of the scenes in the image display device 5. In addition, in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 34A and 34B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness)) shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that "extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B are different in that they are pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Other than that, it is the same, so the explanation will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect will be omitted.

FIG. 34A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or the relevant display. A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 34A, the reach is established after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 34A (b), and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R reach. It is a scene that is stopped and displayed in the mode. In the scene (d) of FIG. 34A, the chance symbol described as "opportunity" appears in the image display device 5 by slow scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene of FIG. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (f) of FIG. 34A, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display) again.

Further, in FIG. 34A (f), an arrow Y2 on which the characters “extreme heat” are drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. Here, (a) of FIG. 34A to (f) of FIG. 34A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 34B (f), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , It is a scene colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (h) of FIG. 34B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (g) of FIG. 34B, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick". , The decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach mode. Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 34B, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick", the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed. Is in the reach mode, the chance symbol is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the scene (j) of FIG. 34B, the chance symbol is displayed without temporarily stopping in the decorative symbol display area 5C. The decorative symbol in the area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are determined as the reach mode.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, FIGS. 35A (a) to (f) and FIGS. 35B (g) to (i) show the scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 35A and 35B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 35A and 35B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness)) shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that "extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B differ in the timing of reaching establishment. Other than that, it is the same, so the explanation will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect will be omitted.

FIG. 35A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or the relevant display. A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. ..

In FIG. 35A (c), the arrow Y2 in which the characters “extreme heat” are drawn in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 35A (b). Is displayed. Here, (a) of FIG. 35A to (c) of FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 35A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , It is a scene that collides with the active display frame AHW. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 35A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick", and the decorative pattern display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the reach mode.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 35A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the image display device 5 by slow scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene (g) of FIG. 35B. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 35B, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display) again. Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 35B, the pseudo-continuous variation is completed, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, FIGS. 36A (a) to (f) and FIGS. 36B (g) to (i) show the scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 36A and 36B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 36A and 36B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness)) shown in FIG. 27 (B). It is assumed that "extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B and the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 35A and 35B differ in the timing of reaching establishment. Other than that, it is the same, so the explanation will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect will be omitted.

FIG. 36A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started, or the relevant display. A special image showing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. ..

FIG. 36A shows an arrow Y2 in which the characters “super heat” are drawn on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 36A (b). Is displayed. Here, (a) of FIG. 35A to (c) of FIG. 35A are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. Then, in the scene (d) of FIG. 36A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the revariable display in the scene of FIG. 35B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , It is a scene colliding with the active display frame AHW. Then, in the scene (e) of FIG. 36A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "extremely thick", and the decorative pattern display area 5L This is a scene in which the decorative design and the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5R are stopped and displayed in the reach mode.

In the scene (f) of FIG. 36A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the image display device 5 by slow scrolling in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the chance symbol is the decorative symbol in the scene (g) of FIG. 36B. Temporarily stop in the display area 5C. Then, in the scene (h) of FIG. 36B, all the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are variably displayed (re-variable display) again. Then, in the scene (i) of FIG. 36B, the pseudo-continuous variation is completed, and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode.

Here, in FIGS. 36A and 36B, examples of scenes in which the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in a reach mode are shown in FIGS. 36A (e) and 36B (i). However, as shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B, when a pseudo-continuous fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, "timing 3" in FIG. 28 is treated as the timing of FIG. 36B (i). That is, the establishment of reach in FIGS. 36A and 36B means that the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in the reach mode after the pseudo-continuous variation is completed. It is the scene of i).

In FIGS. 29 to 36, the success effect can be executed depending on the timing at which the active display change effect (first system change effect, second system change effect, first system change effect, and second system change effect) is executed. If the degree of expectation is different, for example, there is an active display change effect executed at the first timing and an active display change effect executed at the second timing later than the first timing in the fluctuation, it is executed at the second timing. It shows that there is a high degree of expectation that a successful production in the active display change production can be executed.

(Modified example) The display mode of the hold display does not have to be the display mode showing the degree of expectation for the jackpot shown in FIG. 24, and the normal mode (default, initial color) display mode and the normal mode May include a different special aspect and a first special aspect and a second special aspect that are different from the normal aspect and the special aspect. It will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 37, 38 and 39.

For example, instead of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 24, another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 may be used. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables according to the variable category. FIG. 37 (A) shows a hold display mode selected when the variable category "PA1 (shortened / non-reach loss)" or the variable category "PA2 (non-reach (loss))" is selected from the above seven types. This is an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table (H-TBL1). FIG. 37 (B) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss)”) among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 37 (C) shows the setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category “PA4 (super reach α (loss)” is selected among the above seven types. An example (H-TBL3).

FIG. 37 (D) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category is “PA5 (super reach β (loss)” among the above seven types. (H-TBL4). FIG. 37 (E) shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variable category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above seven types. FIG. 37 (F) is an example of setting the determination ratio of the mode (H-TBL5). FIG. 37 (F) is a hold selected when the variable category “PB4 (super reach α (big hit))” is selected among the above seven types. It is an example (H-TBL6) of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the display mode determination table. FIG. 37 (G) shows the variable category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL7) of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when.

Comparing FIG. 37 and FIG. 24, it is different that a part of the determination ratio to “white” in each hold display mode determination table in FIG. 24 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. 37. Specifically, the determination ratio of "white" in each hold display mode determination table is 4: 1 between the determination ratio of "white" and the determination ratio of "gray" in each hold display mode determination table of FIG. 37. This is a setting example to which the determination ratio is assigned. In this setting example, "white" is a display mode (normal mode) of the normal hold display, and "gray" is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode has the same expectation for the jackpot as the normal mode, but when the "gray" hold display becomes the active display, the ratio of executing the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is It is a display mode indicating that it is high.

In the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode). Unlike the special mode, yellow, which is the second special mode in which the expectation for the jackpot is different (for example, the expectation for the jackpot is higher than the first special mode), and the expectation for the jackpot is different from the normal mode and the special mode A third special aspect, such as red, which is different (for example, has a higher expectation for a big hit than the second special aspect) may also be included.

For example, in the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 determines a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 37 based on the variation category specified by the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the table, and is additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of the hold display to be to be displayed (display mode at the time of addition) may be determined.

Then, after executing the first hold effect determination process (S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the decision content of the first hold effect determination process based on the decision result of the first hold effect determination process (S161). .. Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to correspond to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C.

Then, after executing the process of S161, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (S160) (the first start winning in the first start winning command buffer 194A). A new hold display is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL based on the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first. The hold addition process is executed (S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL in the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect is produced. The hold display according to the addition display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL.

Then, in the process of S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 25, when the process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the fluctuation, or when executing the active display change effect, which active Processing to determine whether to execute the display change effect, in the case of active display (variation) to execute the active display change effect, process to determine the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed, and active in the variation. A process of determining the timing for executing the display change effect, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

Here, the effect execution setting process (S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the fluctuation, and a process of determining which active display change effect to be executed when executing an active display change effect will be described. To do. When the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 37 is used, the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. .. Here, the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 are active corresponding to the fluctuation. The difference is that a setting example of the determination ratio by another active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table is referred to depending on whether or not the display mode of the display is a special mode.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing another setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 38A is an example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, which is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is not the special mode (gray). 38 (B) is an example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, which is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is the special mode (gray). Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) shows whether or not to execute the active display change effect and when the active display change effect is executed, as in the setting example shown in FIG. 26. This is an example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode of the active display change effect. Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) is compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table. Numerical values (decision values) are assigned to "with execution" and "without execution" at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B), respectively. Further, in the "execution enabled" of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the active display change effect execution presence / absence is "first system". Decisions as shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B) for "change effect", "second system change effect", and "first system change effect and second system change effect", respectively. Allotted as a percentage.

In addition, "execution available" and "first system change effect" indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and "execution available" and "second system change effect" indicate the second system change effect. "Execution Yes" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" indicate that the active display change effect is performed, and the active display change of both the 1st system change effect and the 2nd system change effect. Indicates that it will be performed as a production. In addition, "no execution" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

According to FIG. 38, when the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (the variable display) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "no execution" is 100. %, Which means that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect is executed. In addition, when the active display change effect is executed (in the case of "execution enabled" in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B)), when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ), The rate at which the first system change effect is executed is higher than that of the second system change effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit", the ratio of the first system change effect being executed is higher than that of the second system change effect as compared with the case of "loss". Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the ratio of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than that when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit", the ratio of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect being executed is higher than when the variation pattern is "loss".

Further, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is in a special mode, the determination rate of whether or not the active display change effect is executed differs, and if the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is in a special mode, the fluctuation The rate of determination that the active display change effect is executed is higher than that in the case where the active display corresponding to is not a special mode. Further, there are cases where the special mode as shown in FIG. 26 is not considered, cases where the special mode as shown in FIG. 38 (A) is taken into consideration, and the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is not a special mode, and cases where the active display corresponds to the fluctuation is not a special mode (B). In consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 38 and comparing the case where the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is the special mode and each of the cases, the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 (A) is compared. , The determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 26 and the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 38 (B) are higher in this order.

That is, in the effect execution setting process (S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining the execution presence / absence of the active display change effect, and the variation pattern specification command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect according to the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (the variable display), and when the active display change effect is executed, among a plurality of active display change effect effect modes. , Determine which active display change effect to execute.

The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined that the active display change effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the active display change effect is executed. And any of the second system change effect "may be determined.

The figure group Y1 to be displayed as the first system change effect may be determined so that the degree of expectation for a big hit changes depending on the combination of the figures constituting the figure group Y1. It will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 39.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination ratio by the first system detailed pattern determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect. In each setting example shown in FIG. 39, in the first system detailed pattern determination table of the first system change effect, for example, 10 types of first system detailed patterns SHP1 corresponding to the combination of three figures of triangle, pentagram, and star are displayed. ~ SHP10 is included. This first system detailed pattern includes a case where only the first system change effect is executed (when it is determined to be any of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 27 (A)) and the first system change effect. It is referred to when both the second system change effect and the second system change effect are executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 27 (C) is determined).

In this first system detailed pattern, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detailed pattern is determined by the active display change effect pattern at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 39. Allocated.

It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the first system detailed pattern as the effect mode of the first system change effect of 10 types corresponding to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG. 27.

In FIG. 39, the first system detailed pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of triangles. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination ratio determined when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 27, and when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is high. Compared to the case of hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination rate determined for the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher. Further, the display mode of the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is determined by the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 27, and the details of the first system which can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined fluctuation. The pattern is determined.

Similarly, the first system detailed pattern "SHP2" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a pentagon, a triangle, and a triangle, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP3" is a figure. This is an effect pattern when the three figures that make up the group Y1 are composed of pentagons, pentagons, and triangles. In the first system detailed pattern "SHP4", the three figures that make up the figure group Y1 are pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detailed pattern "SHP5" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, triangles, and triangles, and is the first system. The detailed pattern "SHP6" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a pentagon, and a triangle, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP7" constitutes the figure group Y1. This is an effect pattern when one figure is composed of stars, pentagons, and pentagons. In the first system detailed pattern "SHP8", the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, triangles, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern "SHP9" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, and pentagons, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP10". Is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars. According to the illustrated example, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed differs depending on the combination of the figures constituting the figure group Y1.

In addition, when considering the special mode as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, when the active display change effect is executed for the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the special mode, the above-mentioned common effect is applied. , It may be executed as a suggestion effect suggesting a success effect and a failure effect, and a suggestion effect suggesting an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special mode (for example, a success effect and a failure effect). (Suggestion effect) suggesting a common effect that is commonly executed in and may be executed in the same or different manners. Although the active display change effect with respect to the active display has been described when the special mode is considered as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is the special mode. In some cases, a hold change effect that is executed in the same or different manner as the active display change effect may be executed for the hold display displayed in the special mode.

In FIG. 39, among the figure group Y1 composed of the initial display (combination), the figure to be erased in the common effect may be deleted from the figure having the display mode of the active display having a low expectation. For example, when the first system detailed pattern SHP6 is determined as the success effect, the display mode after the success effect is executed among the figure group composed of the three figures of "star", "pentagon", and "triangle". Of the two figures other than the figure (for example, "pentagon"), the figure with low expectation (for example, "triangle") is deleted first, and then the figure with low expectation (for example, "star") is deleted. In the case of a failure production, the "triangle", "pentagon", and "star" are deleted in this order from the group of figures composed of the three figures "star", "pentagon", and "triangle". May be good.

FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the display mode change effect and the presence / absence of the display mode change execution in the display mode change effect. FIG. 40A shows an example in which the display mode change is executed after the display mode change effect is executed for the hold display or the active display. FIG. 40B shows an example in which the display mode change effect is not executed after the display mode change effect is executed for the hold display or the active display.

As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, as the display mode change effect suggesting that the display mode changes for the hold display or the active display, the display mode of the target hold display or the active display is used. A similar effect is performed regardless of whether or not it actually changes. Then, when "no change" is selected as the change effect mode as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M), the hold display or the active display is targeted as shown in FIG. 40 (B). After the display mode change effect is executed, the change of the hold display or the active display is not executed. On the other hand, when "opportunity" display or "super heat" display, "two people" display or "three people" display is selected as the change effect mode as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M). , As shown in FIG. 40 (A), after the display mode change effect for the hold display or the active display is executed, the change of the hold display or the active display is executed. In this way, the execution of the display mode change effect of the hold display or the active display is different from the execution of the change of the hold display or the active display.

Next, a character icon selection table in which data for selecting a character icon used as the first specific display mode of the hold display or the active display is set, and a character used as the second specific display mode of the hold display or the active display. A character icon selection table in which data for selecting an icon is set will be described. These tables are stored in the RAM 122.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a character icon selection table and a character icon selection table. The character icon selection table is shown in FIG. 41 (A), and the character selection table is shown in FIG. 41 (B).

In the character icon selection table of FIG. 41 (A), the character icon consisting of the character "Caution" in the normal display mode selected as the display when the hold display appears, and the effect selection of FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I). A character icon consisting of the characters "opportunity" that can be selected as the first change display during the display mode change effect by the table, and the second change during the display mode change effect by the effect selection table of FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I). A character icon consisting of the characters "super heat" that can be selected as a display is set to be selectable. The degree of expectation for the jackpot of these character icons is related to "attention" <"opportunity" <"super heat".

In the character icon selection table of FIG. 41 (B), the character icon of "one person" in the normal display mode selected as the display at the time of appearance of the hold display and the effect selection table of FIGS. 26 (J) to 26 (M) are used. The character icon of "two people" that can be selected as the first change display during the display mode change effect and the effect selection table shown in FIGS. 26 (J) to 26 (M) can be selected as the second change display during the display mode change effect. "Three people" character icons are set to be selectable. The degree of expectation for a big hit for these character icons has a relationship of "1 person" <"2 people" <"3 people".

Next, a change effect pattern table in which data for selecting the effect patterns of the first change effect to the fourth change effect described above are set will be described. The change effect pattern table is stored in the RAM 122.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a change effect pattern table. In the change effect pattern table, the effect pattern when the change effect is selected during the hold display and the change effect during the active display are selected for each type of the first change effect to the fourth change effect. The production pattern of the time is shown. The selection of the change effect during the hold display and the selection of the change effect during the active display are performed using the data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) to 26 (E).

When the hold display is selected for the first change effect, the effect pattern effect (see FIG. 43) in which the blue arrow acts downward is selected with respect to the hold display of the character icon to be produced. Is executed. When the active display is selected for the first change effect, the effect pattern effect in which the blue arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon to be produced. ..

When the second change effect is selected to be on hold, the effect pattern effect in which the red arrow acts downward is selected and executed with respect to the hold display of the character icon to be produced. .. When the second change effect is selected to be active, the effect pattern effect in which the red arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon to be produced. ..

When the third change effect is selected to be on hold, the effect pattern effect in which the blue arrow acts downward is selected and executed with respect to the hold display of the character icon to be produced. .. When the third change effect is selected to be active, the effect pattern effect in which the blue arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon to be produced. ..

When the fourth change effect is selected to be on hold, the effect pattern effect in which the red arrow acts downward is selected and executed with respect to the hold display of the character icon to be produced. .. When the fourth change effect is selected to be active, the effect pattern effect in which the red arrow acts in the horizontal direction is selected and executed with respect to the active display of the character icon to be produced. ..

Next, an example of the effect display when the character icon is displayed as the hold display will be described. FIG. 43 is a display screen view showing an effect display example when the character icon 61 is displayed as a hold display on the image display device 5.

When a new first hold display mode is generated and the hold display mode by the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 24, first, as shown in FIG. 43 (A). A display is displayed in which the hold display by the character icon 61, which is a normal display mode, is displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL.

The timing of the change effect is selected and determined as "pending display" by the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 26 (B), and the change effect type is selected by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 26 (D). Is selected and determined as the "first change effect", as shown in FIG. 43 (B), during the hold display after the first hold shift after the hold display by the character icon 61 displaying "caution" appears. As shown, as the display mode change effect, the first change effect in which the blue arrow acts downward with respect to the hold display by the character icon 61 of "attention" display is executed.

When the display after the first change effect is selected and determined to be the "super heat" display by the change selection table during the first change effect hold display in FIG. 26 (F), as shown in FIG. 43 (C), the first Display mode by change effect After the change effect is executed, the hold display by the character icon 61 is changed from the "caution" display to the "super heat" display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. In this way, when the hold display by the character icon 61 changes, the player's expectation for the jackpot of the hold display can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, an effect display example when the character icon is displayed as the active display after the hold display will be described. FIG. 44 is a display screen view showing an effect display example of active display after displaying the character icon 62 as a hold display on the image display device 5.

When a new first hold display mode is generated and the hold display mode by the character icon is determined using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIG. 24, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (A). A display is displayed in which the hold display by the character icon 62, which is the normal display mode of "one person" display, appears in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. In the state of FIG. 44 (A), after the hold display by the character icon 62 of "one person" display appears and displayed, the hold display before that is digested, and the hold display for the next variable display is "1". A state in which the character icon 62 called "person" display is on hold is shown.

Then, the timing of the change effect is selected and determined as "active display" by the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 26 (C), and is changed by the character hold change effect type selection table of FIG. 26 (E). When the effect type is selected and determined as the "fourth change effect", the active display corresponding to the hold display by the character icon 62 displayed as "one person" as shown in FIG. 44 (B) is the active display area. In AHA, it is performed by the character icon 62 of the "one person" display, and as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the red arrow is horizontal to the active display by the character icon 62 of the "one person" display as a display mode change effect. The fourth change effect acting from the direction is executed.

Then, when the display after the third change effect is selected and determined to be the "three people" display by the change selection table during the fourth change effect active display in FIG. 26 (M), as shown in FIG. 44 (C). After executing the change effect by the fourth change effect, the hold display by the character icon 62 is changed from the "1 person" display to the "3 person" display in the active display area AHA. In this way, when the active display by the character icon 62 changes, the player's expectation for the big hit of the variable display this time can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, an icon effect included in the effect execution setting process (S532) for setting an effect for holding display by a character icon and a character icon using various data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) to 26 (M). The setting process will be described.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the icon effect setting process. Regarding the process for setting the effect when the hold display or the active display by the character icon and the character icon is performed using the various data tables of FIGS. 26 (B) to 26 (M), the effect execution setting process (S532) described above As described above in relation to the processing contents related to, in FIG. 45, in order to clarify the flow of setting the effect when the hold display or the active display is performed by the character icon and the character icon, the specific icon effect setting process is specified. The processing contents will be explained.

In the table of FIG. 24, when the hold display mode of the character icon or the character icon is selected and determined, the icon effect setting process is executed. In the icon effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the following process. First, the random number value MR10 is extracted, and the change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 26 (B) or FIG. 26 (C) is used according to the hold display mode of the character icon or character icon selected in the table of FIG. 24. Then, either "holding display" or "active display" is selected and determined as the execution timing of the display mode change effect (S700).

Next, the random value MR11 is extracted, and the change shown in FIG. 26 (D) or FIG. 26 (E) is changed according to the change effect execution timing of “holding display” or “active display” selected and determined by S700. Using the effect type selection table, select and determine "first change effect" or "second change effect" for "pending display", and select "third change effect" or "third change effect" for "active display". "Fourth change effect" is selected and determined (S701).

Next, it is determined in S701 whether or not the "first change effect" is selected and determined (S702). When it is determined by S702 that the "first change effect" has been selected and determined, it is determined in S700 whether or not "pending display" has been selected and determined (S703). When it is determined by S703 that "hold display" is selected and determined, the random number value MR12 is extracted in order to execute the first change effect during the hold display, and the first change effect hold in FIG. 26 (F). Using the change selection table during display, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), one of "no change", "opportunity" display, and "super heat" display can be displayed as the display change mode after the first change effect. (S704), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined by S703 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the first change effect during active display. Is extracted, and the change selection table during the first change effect active display in FIG. 26 (G) is used to display "no change", "opportunity" display, and "extreme heat" according to the display result (big hit, loss). One of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the first change effect (S705), and the process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined by S702 that the "first change effect" has not been selected and determined in S701, it is determined whether or not the "second change effect" has been selected and determined in S701 (S706). When it is determined by S706 that the "second change effect" has been selected and determined, it is determined in S700 whether or not "pending display" has been selected and determined (S707).

When it is determined by S707 that "hold display" is selected and determined, the random number value MR12 is extracted in order to execute the second change effect during the hold display, and the second change effect hold in FIG. 26 (H). Using the change selection table during display, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), one of "no change", "opportunity" display, and "super heat" display can be displayed as the display change mode after the second change effect. (S708), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined by S707 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the second change effect during active display. Is extracted, and the change selection table during the second change effect active display of FIG. 26 (I) is used, and "no change", "opportunity" display, and "super heat" display are displayed according to the display result (big hit, loss). One of them is selected and determined as the display change mode after the second change effect (S709), and the process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined by S706 that the "second change effect" has not been selected and determined, it is determined in S701 whether or not the "third change effect" has been selected and determined (S710). When it is determined by S710 that the "third change effect" has been selected and determined, it is determined in S700 whether or not "on hold display" has been selected and determined (S711). When it is determined by S711 that "hold display" is selected and determined, the random number value MR12 is extracted in order to execute the third change effect during the hold display, and the third change effect hold in FIG. 26 (J). Using the change selection table during display, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), one of "no change", "2 people" display, and "3 people" display is displayed after the third change effect. The mode is selected and determined (S712), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined by S711 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the third change effect during active display. Is extracted, and the change selection table during the third change effect active display in FIG. 26 (K) is used, and "no change", "2 people" display, and "3 people" are displayed according to the display result (big hit, loss). One of the above is selected and determined as the display change mode after the third change effect (S713), and the process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined by S710 that the "third change effect" has not been selected and determined in S701, it is determined whether or not the "fourth change effect" has been selected and determined in S701 (S714). When it is determined by S714 that the "fourth change effect" has been selected and determined, it is determined in S700 whether or not "pending display" has been selected and determined (S715). When it is determined by S715 that "hold display" is selected and determined, the random number value MR12 is extracted in order to execute the fourth change effect during the hold display, and the fourth change effect hold in FIG. 26 (L). Using the change selection table during display, depending on the display result (big hit, loss), one of "no change", "2 people" display, and "3 people" display can be changed after the 4th change effect. The mode is selected and determined (S716), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined by S715 that "pending display" is not selected and determined (when active display is selected and determined), the random number value MR12 is used to execute the fourth change effect during active display. Is extracted, and the change selection table during the 4th change effect active display in FIG. 26 (M) is used, and "no change", "2 people" display, and "3 people" are displayed according to the display result (big hit, loss). One of the above is selected and determined as the display change mode after the fourth change effect (S717), and the process is terminated.

By the icon effect setting process described above, an effect using a character icon or a character icon is set, and the variable display effect process (S172) is executed based on the setting in the process, for example, FIG. 43. Such a hold display mode change effect and a change-corresponding display mode change effect as shown in FIG. 44 are executed.

[Modification example of display mode change effect by icon display]
Next, various variations of the active display effect as described above will be described.

(A) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26B to 26M, 43, and 44, a total of 2 timings during the hold display and 1 timing during the active display. An example is shown in which a display mode change effect that changes the display mode of the character icon display or the character icon display can be executed at any one of the three timings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 46, the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display may be selectable from a plurality of timings.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect example in which the execution timing of the display mode change effect during the hold display is selected from a plurality of timings. FIG. 46A shows a first start winning memory display area 5HL and an active display area AHA for explaining the timing of the display mode change effect. FIG. 46 (B) shows a modified example of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 26 (B). FIG. 46 (C) shows a modified example of the character hold display change effect timing selection table shown in FIG. 26 (C).

With reference to FIG. 46 (A), in this modification, the character icon is displayed at any one of a total of three timings, that is, two timings during the hold display and one timing during the active display. Alternatively, it is possible to execute a display mode change effect that changes the display mode of the character icon display. The two display mode change effect execution timings during the hold display are, for example, the number "2" in the hold display area numbered "1" to "4" in the first start winning memory display area 5HL. The hold display corresponding to the second oldest hold memory with is displayed. When the hold display is displayed in the display area (during the first hold display), the first old hold numbered with "1" is displayed. There are two cases, when the hold display is displayed in the display area where the hold display corresponding to the memory is displayed (during the second hold display).

In this modification, as described above, the display mode change effect is executed at one timing selected from the three timings of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display. In this modification, when the character icon display is displayed on hold, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 46 (B). In the table of FIG. 46 (B), similarly to the table of FIG. 26 (B), the ratio of selecting the display mode change of the character icon during the active display is set lower than that during the hold display. On the other hand, in this modification, when the character icon display is displayed on hold, the timing is selected using the character hold display change effect timing selection table of FIG. 46 (C). In the table of FIG. 46 (C), similarly to the table of FIG. 26 (C), the ratio of selecting the display mode change of the character icon during the hold display is set lower than that during the active display. With such a setting, in this modified example, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. Further, in this way, the production becomes more varied, and the fun of the production can be further improved.

Further, when the hold display is displayed in the character icon display, the closer to the hold display area where the hold display appears, the higher the selection ratio is set. As a result, when the character icon display is displayed on hold, the display mode change effect is executed at the timing during the first hold display, and the display mode change effect is executed at the timing during the second hold display. Therefore, the selection ratios of "no change", "opportunity" display, and "extreme heat" display may be different (for example, the higher the selection ratio, the lower the selection ratio of "extreme heat" display).

In this modified example, for example, a display mode change effect can be executed during the hold display for a part (two) of the four hold display areas. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be enabled to be executed during the hold display for all the hold display areas. Regarding the active display, the period during which the active display is continued to be executed is divided into a plurality of periods, each of the plurality of periods is set as the period during which the display mode change effect can be executed, and one of the periods is the display mode change. It may be selectable as the period for executing the effect. In this way, the production becomes more varied, and the fun of the production can be further improved.

The timing for executing the display mode change effect includes those described as the above-described embodiments and modifications, and is among a plurality of timings during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold memory. Any timing may be set as long as it is executed at any timing.

(B) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 and the like, when the hold display is a character icon, an example is shown in which the display mode of the character icon changes due to the display mode change effect, and the hold display is a character. When it is an icon, an example is shown in which the display mode of the character icon is changed by the display mode change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon is changed to a character icon or the like by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio. You may create an effect that changes to another icon. Further, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon may be changed to another icon such as a character icon by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio. By performing such an effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the change in the display mode (icon display mode) of the specific display or the change in the specific display type (icon type). You can further improve your interest.

In this modified example, as the changed icon, for example, a character icon and an icon display that can be displayed when the hold display appears, such as a character icon and a character icon, may be used and are not displayed when the hold display appears. A specific icon display may be used.

(C) The active display change effect (success effect) and the active display change effect (failure effect) as described in FIGS. 27 to 36B are displayed through the display mode change effect as described in FIGS. 40 to 46. It may be applied to the active display to be performed. Specifically, after starting the active display with the icon shape as described above, in the first system change effect as described above, the effect before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and the second system change effect. In, the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display is executed.

After that, a success effect or a failure effect is executed. As a successful effect, in the first system change effect, an effect in which the figure of one of the shapes "stars" of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and the icon display changes to the "display mode wearing a star crown". In the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame to change the line thickness of the active display frame, and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed and active. The effect of changing the display mode such as the display and the active display frame is executed.

On the other hand, as the failure effect, in the first system change effect, the effect that the figure of any shape "star" of the figure group Y1 disappears before colliding with the active display and the display mode of the active display does not change, the second In the system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the line thickness of the active display frame does not change, both the first system change effect and the second system change effect. Execute an effect that does not change the display mode of the active display or one or both of the active display frames.

That is, a common effect (common effect) is executed when the mode of the active display is changed and when it is not changed. In this case, as described above, the ratio of executing the success effect is controlled to be different depending on which timing the common effect is executed among the plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display.

In this way, when the active display change effect (success effect) or the like as described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 36B is executed after the active display displayed through the display mode change effect described above is executed, the display is displayed. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be higher than when such an active display change effect or the like is not executed after the active display displayed after the mode change effect is executed.

(D) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 can be executed during either the hold display or the active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be executed at both the pending display and the active display.

(E) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 can be executed at any one timing during the hold display period and the active display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode change effect may be able to be executed stepwise at a plurality of timings during the hold display period and the active display period. In that case, for example, the change mode of the icon display may be selected by dividing it into a plurality of stages, and the icon display may be selected and set so that the icon display can be changed stepwise at a plurality of timings.

(F) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46, is displayed in the shape of an icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display or the active display, which is the target of the display mode change effect, may be a display mode different from the display mode of the normal display (for example, "sphere"), and is not limited to the icon shape. .. Therefore, even if the hold display or the active display hold display, which is the target of the display mode change effect, is a sphere, the display mode (for example, the size is different, the color is different) from the display mode such as the shape and color acquired by the normal display. Is different, etc.).

(G) When there are a plurality of types of hold display or active display (for example, the type of icon display selected at the time of hold appearance display) that are the targets of the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46, the case is held. Of the plurality of timings during the display period and the active display period, there may be a type in which the display mode change effect is not executed at all during the hold display period, and the display mode change effect is executed at all during the active display period. Types that are not included may be included.

(H) In the above-described embodiment, the hold display to be executed for the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 is displayed on hold as shown in FIG. 24 at the time of starting winning (hold storage). An example is shown in which only the display mode at the time of appearance display is selected and determined, but at the time of such a start winning prize (at the time of hold storage), the hold display or active display as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M) is displayed. The final display mode (no change, "opportunity", "extreme heat", "2 people", "3 people", etc.) after the change of the pending display mode may be selected and determined.

(I) In the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the hold display to be executed for the display mode change effect as shown in FIGS. 40 to 46 may be a character icon as shown in FIG. 24. , The character icon is determined, but the color of the character icon and the color of the character icon may also be selected and determined as in the above-mentioned "sphere". That is, the display mode of the hold display to be executed for the display mode change effect may be able to select and determine the combination of the icon shape and the icon color. Then, even with the same icon, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be set differently depending on the selected color.

(J) The above-mentioned display mode change effect of the icon display may be executed on condition that the number of reserved icons is a predetermined number such as 3 or 4.

(K) The icon display during the hold display and the icon display during the active display do not have to be exactly the same icon display. For example, the icon display during the hold display is displayed in the first color such as white, while the icon display during the active display is displayed in the second color such as black. The display mode may be partially different from the icon display during active display. Regarding the character icon, the character of the icon being held and displayed may be displayed in Mincho style, the character of the icon being actively displayed may be displayed in block style, and the characters may be the same but the typeface may be different. .. As for the character icons, the number of people may be the same, but the gender may be different, such that the icon being held and displayed is displayed as a male character and the icon being actively displayed is displayed as a female character.

(L) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the hold display and the active display are displayed by the same display means (image display device 5) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display and the active display are different display means. (For example, the hold display may be displayed on the first image display device, and the active display may be displayed on the second image display device).

(M) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the hold display and the active display are displayed using different display areas is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same display area may be used for switching display. Good (for example, a display that does not display the active display area when the hold display is displayed and does not display the hold display area when the active display is displayed).

(N) In the above-described embodiment, the effect mode (type) of the display mode change effect may be different depending on the display mode (character icon, character icon) of the icon display. For example, a dedicated display mode change effect corresponding to the display mode (effect mode) of the icon display may be provided to execute the effect.

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), when the hold display is in the character icon display mode, the hold display is in the hold display mode as compared with the character icon display mode. The rate at which the display mode change effect is executed is higher than during active display. On the other hand, when the character icon is displayed, the display mode change effect is executed at a higher rate during the active display than when the hold display is the character icon display mode. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to the display type of the change target of the display mode change effect (for example, the display type of the character icon and the character icon) and the timing of the display mode change (for example, the timing of the hold display and the active display). It is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect of changing the mode of the hold display.

(2) Regarding the display of the character icon and the display of the character icon, as shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (M), the rate at which the display mode actually changes after the display mode change effect is executed is on hold. Is equal to that during active display. Therefore, when the hold display is the display mode of the character icon, the display mode change effect is executed at a higher rate in the hold display than in the active display as compared with the display mode of the character icon. Based on the fact that when the character icon is displayed, the display mode change effect is executed more frequently during the active display than when the hold display is the character icon display mode. , Depending on whether the hold display is displayed as a character icon display or a character icon display, the frequency at which the icon display mode changes differs between the hold display and the active display. The ratio of selecting whether to change the display mode is different between the active display and the active display. As a result, with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display displayed in the icon shape and the change in the display mode of the active display, the player can pay attention to the display type of the change target and the timing of the change in the display mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game about the change of.

(3) As described above, the common effect that is commonly executed when the mode of the active display is changed during the execution of the variable display and the mode that is not changed, and the mode of the active display after the common effect is executed. It is possible to execute a success effect that changes or a failure effect that does not change the mode, and the ratio of executing the success effect depends on which timing the common effect is executed among the multiple timings during the execution of the variable display. Since they are different, it is possible to pay attention to the execution timing of the common effect. Further, by paying attention to the execution timing of the common effect, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player.

(4) As a modification of the change pattern of the display mode change effect, for example, when the hold display is a character icon, the character icon is changed to another icon such as a character icon by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio. An effect to be performed and an effect in which the character icon is changed to another icon such as a character icon by the display mode change effect at a predetermined ratio when the hold display is performed by the character icon have been described. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to the change in the display mode (icon display mode) of the specific display or the change in the specific display type (icon type), further improving the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

(5) As shown in FIGS. 26 (F) to 26 (I), the "opportunity or intense heat (changed)" display is displayed in the first change effect (blue effect) and the second change effect (red effect). By different proportions, the player can pay attention to the change mode of the icon display during the hold display or the active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 (J) to 26 (M), the display of "2 or 3 people (with change)" is displayed in the third change effect (blue effect) and the fourth change effect (red effect). By different proportions, the player can pay attention to the change mode of the icon display during the hold display or the active display, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(6) Regarding the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), the rate at which the change in the display mode of the character icon is selected during the active display is lower than that during the hold display. As shown in F) to (I), when the jackpot display result is obtained, the level of expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot is higher than the "opportunity" display compared to the hold display during the active display, and the "super heat" display. The rate at which the display mode change is selected is high. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the mode of changing the display mode of the icon display depending on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing. Further, regarding the character icon display, as shown in FIGS. 26 (B) and 26 (C), the ratio of selecting the character icon display mode change during the hold display is lower than that during the active display, but FIG. 26 (J) )-(M), when the jackpot display result is obtained, the level of expectation that the jackpot will be higher than the "2 person" display is higher than that during the active display during the hold display, the "3 person" display. The rate at which the display mode change is selected is high. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the mode of changing the display mode of the icon display depending on the display type of the display mode change target and the selected change timing.

Further, the game machine 1 according to the above embodiment has a variable display (for example, a special figure) after the game medium has passed through the starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) provided in the game area. Variable display of identification information is executed based on the establishment of a start condition that allows the start of variable display, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, etc., and display results (for example, fixed decorative symbols, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine) that controls a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol, etc. 1 etc.), which is a hold storage means for storing hold information up to a predetermined upper limit for variable display of identification information in which the game medium has passed through the start area but the start condition for variable display is not satisfied. For example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A, the second special figure hold storage unit 151B, the first start winning command buffer 194A, the second start winning command buffer 194B, etc.) are stored in the hold storage means. Hold display means for performing hold display in a predetermined display mode for each of the hold information (for example, a process of adding hold display to the first start winning memory display area 5HL in the first hold addition process of S162, or a process of adding hold display to S165. In the second hold addition process of the above, the process of adding the hold display to the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.) and the hold display corresponding to the variable display are supported based on the establishment of the variable display start condition. A special image showing information including the digestion display (for example, an active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA, or information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display. A predetermined area (for example, the active display area AHA is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5, for example. At least the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display AH is displayed. In addition to the special image display means for displaying in the active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH, the area including a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW, etc., and the special image during the execution of the variable display of the identification information. A common effect (for example, in the first system change effect, before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display) that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. In the production and the second system change production, arrow Y2 is a An effect until it collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display, and a success effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect (for example, in the first system change effect, a group of figures in the active display). In the effect that one of the shapes of Y1 "star" collides and changes to the display mode of the star, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame. Or an effect that changes the display mode of the active display, the active display frame, etc. by executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect) or the display mode of the special image is changed. Failure effect that does not cause (for example, in the first system change effect, the effect that the figure of any shape "star" of the figure group Y1 disappears before colliding with the active display and the display mode of the active display does not change, or the second In the system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame so that the line thickness of the active display frame does not change, and these first system change effect and second system change effect. It is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing both of the active display and the effect of not changing the display mode of one or both of the active display frames, and at a plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display of the identification information. Among them, the ratio of executing the success effect differs depending on at which timing the common effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, the gaming machine pays attention to the execution timing of the common effect that encourages whether the display mode of the special image representing the information including the display at the time of digestion corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is changed. Can be made to. In addition, the gaming machine can improve the expectation of the player by paying attention to the execution timing.

Further, in the game machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect can be executed may include before and after the reach display mode forming a part of the specific display result is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the expectation of the player before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after the reach is established).

Further, in the game machine 1, the common effect is performed at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display than when the common effect is executed at the first timing of the variable display of the identification information being executed. When it is executed, the rate at which the success effect is executed may be higher.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information during execution.

Further, in the game machine 1, a predetermining means (for example, in the processing of S412 by the CPU 103, the special figure display result and the number of reserved storages) are determined before the variable display display result is derived and displayed as to whether or not the specific display result is to be obtained. Based on the above, the variable category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variable category determination tables shown in FIG. 17, and the variable category is selected based on the selected variable category determination table and the random value MR3 for determining the variable category. In the determination process, the winning random number value determination process of S220, the process of determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type, etc.) and the hold stored in the hold storage means before the determination of the advance determination means. Specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the information is the specific display result (for example, the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol in the special symbol normal processing of S110 is "big hit" or "small". Of a plurality of types, there are a process of determining whether or not to make a "hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed) and a hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means. It is provided with an effect executing means capable of executing a hold notice effect to be displayed in any of the display modes, and a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed. The display mode of the display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a first special mode and a second special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode, and the effect executing means. Displays the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the judgment target of the specific judgment means in the first special mode or the second special mode at different ratios according to the judgment result of the specific judgment means. In addition, the hold display can be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings and displayed, and the suggestion effect executing means displays the hold display in the special mode. When the hold display is displayed, the suggestion effect may be executed more frequently than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the frequency of execution of the suggestion effect can be increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased.

In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but the hold change effect, which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. You may.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, after the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the execution ratio of executing the above-mentioned common effect as a suggestion effect suggesting a success effect and a failure effect is different, for example. , May be higher, and after the hold display is displayed in a special mode, a suggestion effect suggesting an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, a success effect and a failure effect are commonly executed. For example, it may be increased so that the execution rate of executing the suggestion effect (suggestion effect suggesting a common effect) in the same or different manners is different. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 is a special mode, the active display change effect is applied to the hold display displayed in the special mode. For example, it may be increased so that the execution rate of executing the pending change effect executed in the same or different effect modes is different.

In the above explanation, the main advance notice effect such as the active display change effect has been described, but if it does not affect this main advance notice effect, other main advance notice effects and advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects are executed with the same fluctuation. However, if it does not affect other notice effects such as the main notice effect and the look-ahead notice effect, this main notice effect may be executed with the same variation. Here, when it does not affect, when a plurality of advance notice effects (main advance notice effect, pre-reading advance notice effect) are executed in the change, the execution time for executing each advance notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change. This is the case, or when a plurality of advance notice effects (main advance notice effect, pre-reading advance notice effect) are executed in the fluctuation, it is not difficult for the player to see due to the effect mode of each advance notice effect.

In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. For example, a character having a hammer appears in the hold effect for the hold display, and the action effect of hitting the first hold display with a hammer is executed. It is a decorative design when it is an effect mode that changes the display mode of the hold display, or when the decorative design is composed of eight types of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" and one character image in total of nine types. It may be an effect mode in which the character pops out from the character image and the action effect is executed on the hold display of the target.

In the above description, the display mode when the hold display is added has been described, but when it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the addition display mode and the display mode of the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example based on the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIGS. 24 and 37, and the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as the next variation.

In the above description, as the first system change effect, the display mode of the active display is changed by a figure group composed of a combination of a plurality of figures, and as the second system change effect, the display mode of the active display frame is displayed by an arrow. Although the effect mode for changing the above is described, it does not have to be a figure or an arrow. For example, an effect mode in which a character or the like appears to change the display mode of a special image including an active display or an active display frame may be used.

In the above description, an example in which the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed (display mode at the time of addition) is white has been described, but it is similar to the setting example using the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIGS. 24 and 37. The display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed in, for example, four colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white, gray). The display mode of the hold display may be determined so that the display mode is additionally displayed by the display mode of 3 colors or less or 6 colors or more, and is added by the color of the hold display or the characters or symbols drawn on the hold display. The display mode of the hold display may be determined so that it is displayed, and the display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed according to the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character shape, etc.). Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed according to the movement of the hold display (for example, the operation pattern of the character in the character type hold display).

In the above description, the active display may be deleted from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative symbol, or the active display may be deleted when the variation of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped. Often, the active display may be cleared after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation.

In the above description, after performing a common effect on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, a display mode of a special image representing information including an active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display. An example of executing a failure effect that does not change the display mode of a special image representing information including an active display corresponding to a hold display corresponding to the variable display and a success effect that changes the variable display has been described. The display mode of the success effect or hold display that changes the display mode of the hold display after executing the common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect for any of the hold displays displayed in You may execute a failure effect that does not change.

Further, after performing a success effect or a failure effect on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning prize memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display is supported. Further, a success effect or a failure effect may be executed on the special image representing the information including the active display. In this case, for example, when there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, in step 160 and step 163 in FIG. 23, each of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning memory display area 5H is displayed. On the other hand, the success / failure effect for the hold display, the effect mode, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the variable category, and the active display corresponding to each hold display is further determined. As shown in FIG. 10, the success / failure effect, the effect mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. for the special image representing the information including the active display when becomes are determined according to the variable category and the like. The determined contents may be stored in the first pre-reading advance notice buffer 194C and the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D.

In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 on which the character "super heat" is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn on the arrow Y2, and other characters may be used. May be drawn, or a character or the like may be drawn. Further, when there are a plurality of types of production modes as the second system change effect, the success effect is determined by which of the plurality of types of the second system change effect is selected. Expectations to be executed may be different. Further, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests a display mode of a special image after the execution of the success effect, depending on the effect mode of the second system change effect.

Next, modification examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.
(1) Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various types including the device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

(2) When the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, the hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. Often, if any of the hold displays displayed in the start-up prize memory display area 5H has a hold display displayed in a special mode, either one of the hold displays displayed in the start-up prize memory display area 5H or the active display A hold change effect or an active display change effect may be executed for the object.

(3) Either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect of changing the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, it is displayed on the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, such as the first system change effect that changes the shape and the second system change effect that changes the line thickness of the active display frame. The display mode of the active display so that the display mode is a color with a higher expectation of a big hit than the color of the hold display (for example, a color such as yellow or red in the case of the hold display displayed in blue). The color in is changed.

(4) In order that the degree of expectation that the success effect is executed differs depending on the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA, for example, FIGS. 27 (A) to 27 (A) to FIG. An example of setting the determination ratio of the effect mode set as in 27 (C) may be used, and the success effect for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. An example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode in which the determination ratio of the display mode of the active display such as the color of the active display is set to be different may be used.

(5) For example, in the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table in FIG. 26, the ratio of the active display change effect of the variation pattern “PA4-X” is “executed” and “not executed”. , 45% (sum of 1st system change effect 15%, 2nd system change effect 10%, 1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect 20%) vs. 55%, "executed" and "not executed" The ratio may be set for each of the above, and the ratio of “with execution” and “without execution” as in the fluctuation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. 26 is 0% to 100%. The ratio according to the embodiment may be set so that any one of the plurality is set as 0%.

(6) In the probability change control, a game machine may be used in which a specific area is provided in advance in the large winning opening and the game machine is controlled to the probability change state based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area. For example, based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the game ball enters a specific area in the jackpot by being assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-probability", "probability", and "probability". It may be a gaming machine that is controlled to an easy gaming state and is controlled to a probabilistic state based on the passage of the gaming ball through this specific area.

(7) In addition, various production operations including the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart, and display operation of the production image in the display area of the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are described in the present invention. Any changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit.

(8) A game score for use in a game is given and given by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the game machine into a game area using a game score or a game score given by winning a game.

That is, it is provided with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each of the game media based on the passage of the starting area provided in the game area and deriving and displaying the display result. A game machine that controls a specific game state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but the game score is used in the game machine when the game score is not 0. The game is played by driving the game ball enclosed in the game into the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hit of the game ball, and the game is played according to the winning area provided in the game area. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine that adds points. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game points is recorded, and a game record. A game recording medium processing means for reading the recording information recorded on the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion slot may be provided.

(9) In the above description, when the fluctuation is started in order to notify the production control microcomputer (the production control CPU 120) of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream. Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103) uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc., before reaching (when not reaching). Is sent a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (before the so-called second stop), and the second command is used after reaching (when not reaching), such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect. May send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode (after the so-called second stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

(10) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided to the computer device and the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detachable recording medium, and are not limited to the form distributed and provided in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

(11) The game is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form in which it can be executed, or a form in which it is directly executed by using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is illustrated, but the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and is, for example, a value in the range of 0% to 100%. Of these, a value containing 0%, a value containing 100%, and a value containing 0% and 100% may be used.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, as the probability variation jackpot, a probability variation state control example in which the variation display result is derived and displayed and then the probability variation state is unconditionally controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is shown. However, not limited to this, the probability change determination device is controlled to the probability change state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

(14) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The specific game state (big hit game state) is the big prize opening after a predetermined time (symbol confirmation stop time + big hit start production time) elapses after a specific symbol combination (doublet of the same symbol) is displayed on the display device. Is released and a specific game state is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific symbol provided in the game area after a specific symbol combination (doublet of the same symbol) is displayed on the display device. The specific gaming state may be started by passing the ball through the area (specific passage gate sensor or winning sensor). As a result, the player can control when the jackpot occurs, and even if the ball is exhausted before the jackpot starts, the player can lend the ball and have time to replenish the ball.
Further, a plurality of specific regions may be provided, and the number of jackpot rounds may be different depending on which specific region is passed. In addition, a lottery for the number of big hit rounds may be performed by passing through a specific area. Further, in that case, if there are a plurality of specific areas, the lottery ratio of the number of rounds may be different depending on which specific area is passed.

1 Pachinko game machine, 151A 1st special figure holding storage unit, 151B 2nd special figure holding storage unit, 194A 1st start winning command buffer, 194B 2nd starting winning command buffer, 5 image display device, 102 RAM , 5HL 1st start winning memory display area, 5HR 2nd start winning memory display area, 120 effect control CPU, Y1 graphic group, Y2 arrow, AHA active display area.

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can display fluctuations and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A hold storage means that stores information related to variable display as hold storage information ,
And hold display is displayable hold display means corresponding to the hold stored information,
A variable response display means capable of performing a variable response display corresponding to the variable display during execution of the variable display,
A change in the mode of the hold display that changes the mode of the hold display before the variable display of the target stored storage information is executed, and a change in the mode of the variable correspondence display that changes the mode of the variable display during the execution of the variable display. A display mode changing means capable of executing at least one of the display mode changes at any of a plurality of timings during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage information. and,
At least one of the change effect of the first change effect suggesting the change of the hold display mode and the second change effect suggesting the change of the change corresponding display mode is the hold display period corresponding to the target hold storage information and the hold display period. A change effect executing means that can be executed at any of a plurality of timings during the variable display period is provided.
The display mode change is executed according to which of the first specific mode and the second specific mode different from the normal mode is the display mode of the hold display and the variation corresponding display to be changed by the display mode changing means. Unlike selection ratio of timing the selected ratio of the timing to perform different a Rutotomoni, a change in production that is,
The change effect executing means executes the change effect by selecting from a plurality of types of change effects having different display modes for each of the first change effect and the second change effect.
Of the first timing and the second timing included in a plurality of timings during the hold display period and the variable display period corresponding to the target hold storage information for each of the first specific mode and the second specific mode. When the timing with the lower selection ratio is selected, the rate at which the degree of expectation for the player changes to a predetermined or higher display mode is higher than when the timing with the higher selection ratio is selected . Game machine. During variable display of variable after execution and when changing the mode of fluctuation corresponding display, and when not to change the aspect of fluctuation corresponding display, a common effect that is commonly performed in, the common effect success effect changes the mode of movement corresponding display or further comprising a presentation execution unit capable of executing the failure effect and, that do not alter the aspect of fluctuation corresponding display,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the ratio of executing the success effect differs depending on which timing the common effect is executed among the plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display.